Peavey ESCORT 3000 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Micrófonos
Tipo
El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

www.peavey.com
Escort
®
3000
Portable PA System
Operating
Manual
Intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufcient magnitude to constitute
a risk of electric shock to persons.
Intended to alert the user of the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
CAUTION: Risk of electrical shock — DO NOT OPEN!
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualied service personnel.
WARNING: To prevent electrical shock or re hazard, this apparatus should not be exposed to rain or moisture‚ and objects lled with liquids‚ such as vases‚
should not be placed on this apparatus. Before using this apparatus‚ read the operating guide for further warnings.
Protective earthing terminal. The apparatus should be connected to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.
SPANISHENGLISH
FINNISH
FRENCH
GERMAN
Tarkoitettu kiinnittämään käyttäjän huomio sellaiseen eristämättömään vaaralliseen jännitteeseen tuotteen kotelossa, joka saattaa olla riittävän suuri
aiheuttaakseen sähköiskuvaaran.
Tarkoitettu kiinnittämään käyttäjän huomio tärkeisiin käyttö- ja huolto-ohjeisiin tuotteen mukana seuraavassa ohjeistuksessa.
VAROITUS: Sähköiskun vaara — ÄLÄ AVAA!
VAROITUS: Sähköiskuvaaran vuoksi älä poista kantta. Ei sisällä käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia osia. Huoltaminen tulee jättää pätevän huoltohenkilöstön
tehtäväksi.
VAARA: Sähköiskun tai tulipalon vaaran estämiseksi tätä laitetta ei saa altistaa sateelle tai kosteudelle, eikä sen päälle saa asettaa nesteellä täytettyjä
esineitä, kuten maljakoita. Ennen laitteen käyttöä lue muut varoitukset käyttöohjeesta.
Suojamaadoitus terminaali. Laite tulee kytkeä sähköverkkoon suojajohtimella.
Ce symbole est utilisé dans ce manuel pour indiquer à l’utilisateur la présence d’une tension dangereuse pouvant être d’amplitude sufsante pour constituer
un risque de choc électrique.
Ce symbole est utilisé dans ce manuel pour indiquer à l’utilisateur qu’il ou qu’elle trouvera d’importantes instructions concernant l’utilisation et l’entretien de
l’appareil dans le paragraphe signalé.
ATTENTION: Risques de choc électrique — NE PAS OUVRIR!
ATTENTION: An de réduire le risque de choc électrique, ne pas enlever le couvercle. Il ne se trouve à l’intérieur aucune pièce pouvant être reparée par
l’utilisateur. Conez I’entretien et la réparation de l’appareil à un réparateur Peavey agréé.
AVIS: Dans le but de reduire les risques d’incendie ou de decharge electrique, cet appareil ne doit pas etre expose a la pluie ou a l’humidite et aucun objet
rempli de liquide, tel qu’un vase, ne doit etre pose sur celui-ci. Avant d’utiliser de cet appareil, lisez attentivement le guide fonctionnant pour avertissements
supplémentaires.
Borne de terre de protection. L'appareil doit être connecté à une prise secteur avec une connexion à la terre.
Dieses Symbol soll den Anwender vor unisolierten gefährlichen Spannungen innerhalb des Gehäuses warnen, die von Ausreichender Stärke sind, um einen
elektrischen Schlag verursachen zu können.
Dieses Symbol soll den Benutzer auf wichtige Instruktionen in der Bedienungsanleitung aufmerksam machen, die Handhabung und Wartung des Produkts
betreffen.
VORSICHT: Risiko — Elektrischer Schlag! Nicht öffnen!
VORSICHT: Um das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden, nicht die Abdeckung enfernen. Es benden sich keine Teile darin, die vom Anwender
repariert werden könnten. Reparaturen nur von qualiziertem Fachpersonal durchführen lassen.
WARNUNG: Um elektrischen Schlag oder Brandgefahr zu verhindern, sollte dieser Apparat nicht Regen oder Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden und
Gegenstände mit Flüssigkeiten gefuellt, wie Vasen, nicht auf diesen Apparat gesetzt werden. Bevor dieser Apparat verwendet wird, lesen Sie bitte den
Funktionsführer für weitere Warnungen.
Schutzerdung Terminal. Das Gerät nur an Steckdose mit Schutzleiter angeschlossen werden.
Este símbolo tiene el propósito, de alertar al usuario de la presencia de “(voltaje) peligroso” sin aislamiento dentro de la caja del producto y que puede tener
una magnitud suciente como para constituir riesgo de descarga eléctrica.
Este símbolo tiene el propósito de alertar al usario de la presencia de instruccones importantes sobre la operación y mantenimiento en la información que
viene con el producto.
PRECAUCION: Riesgo de descarga eléctrica ¡NO ABRIR!
PRECAUCION: Para disminuír el riesgo de descarga eléctrica, no abra la cubierta. No hay piezas útiles dentro. Deje todo mantenimiento en manos del
personal técnico cualicado.
ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir choque electrico o riesgo de incendios, este aparato no se debe exponer a la lluvia o a la humedad. Los objetos llenos de
liquidos, como los oreros, no se deben colocar encima de este aparato. Antes de usar este aparato, lea la guia de funcionamiento para otras advertencias.
Terminal de puesta a tierra de protección. El aparato debe estar conectado a una toma de corriente con conexión a tierra de protección.
SWEDISH
ITALIAN PORTUGUESE
Är avsedd att varna användaren för förekomsten av oisolerad ”farlig spänning” inom produktens hölje som kan vara av tillräcklig nivå för att personer ska
riskera elektrisk stöt.
Är avsedd att uppmärksamma användaren på förekomsten av viktiga handhavande- och underhållsinstruktioner (service) i den litteratur som medföljer
produkten.
OBSERVERA: Risk för elektrisk stöt – ÖPPNA INTE!
OBSERVERA: För att minska risken för elektrisk stöt, avlägsna inte höljet. Inga delar inuti kan underhållas av användaren. Låt kvalicerad servicepersonal
sköta servicen.
VARNING: För att förebygga elektrisk stöt eller brandrisk bör apparaten inte utsättas för regn eller fukt, och föremål fyllda med vätskor, såsom vaser, bör
inte placeras på denna apparat. Läs bruksanvisningen för ytterligare varningar innan denna apparat används.
Skyddsjordning terminalen. Apparaten skall anslutas till ett uttag med skyddande jordanslutning.
Atto ad avvisare l’utente in merito alla presenza “voltaggio pericoloso” non isolato all’interno della scatola del prodotto che potrebbe avere una magnitudo
sufciente a costituire un rischio di scossa elettrica per le persone.
Atto ad avvisare l’utente in merito alla presenza di istruzioni operative e di assistenza importanti (manutenzione) nel libretto che accompagna il prodotto.
ATTENZIONE: Rischio di scossa elettrica — NON APRIRE!
ATTENZIONE: per ridurre il rischio di scossa elettrica, non rimuovere il coperchio. Non vi sono parti utili all’utente all’interno. Fare riferimento a personale
addetto qualicato.
AVVERTENZA: per prevenire il rischio di scossa o il rischio di incendio, questo apparecchio non dovrebbe essere esposto a pioggia o umidità, e oggetti
riempiti con liquidi, come vasi, non dovrebbero essere posizionati sopra questo apparecchio. Prima di usare questo apparecchio, leggere la guida operativa
per ulteriori informazioni.
Morsetto di terra di protezione. L'apparecchio deve essere collegato a una presa di corrente di rete con un conduttore di terra.
Destinado a alertar o usuário da presença de “voltagem perigosa” não isolada dentro do receptáculo do produto que pode ser de magnitude suciente para
constituir um risco de choque elétrico a pessoas.
Destinado a alertar o usuário da presença de instruções importantes de operação e manutenção (conserto) na literatura que acompanha o produto.
CUIDADO: Risco de choque elétrico — NÃO ABRA!
CUIDADO: Para evitar o risco de choque elétrico, não remova a cobertura. Contém peças não reparáveis pelo usuário. Entregue todos os consertos apenas
a pessoal qualicado.
ADVERTÊNCIA: Para evitar choques elétricos ou perigo de incêndio, este aparelho não deve ser exposto à chuva ou umidade e objetos cheios de líquidos,
tais como vasos, não devem ser colocados sobre ele. Antes de usar este aparelho, leia o guia de operação para mais advertências.
Terminal de aterramento de proteção. O aparelho deve ser ligado a uma tomada eléctrica com ligação à terra de proteção .
NORWEGIAN DUTCH
Bedoeld om de gebruiker te attenderen op de aanwezigheid van ongeïsoleerde “gevaarlijke spanning” binnen de behuizing van het product dat van voldoende om-
vang kan zijn om een risico op elektrische schokken te vormen.
Bedoeld om de gebruiker te attenderen op de aanwezigheid van belangrijke gebruiks- en onderhoudsinstructies in de literatuur bij het product.
OPGELET: Risico op een elektrische schok - NIET OPENEN
OPGELET: Om het risico op elektrische schokken te verkleinen, verwijder niet het deksel. Er zijn geen voor de gebruiker bruikbare onderdelen binnenin aanwezig.
Verwijs onderhoud door naar gekwaliceerd onderhoudspersoneel.
WAARSCHUWING: Om elektrische schokken of brandgevaar te voorkomen, stel dit apparaat mag niet bloot aan regen of vocht ‘ en voorwerpen gevuld met vloei-
stoffen, zoals vazen mogen niet op dit apparaat worden geplaatst. Lees de gebruiksaanwijzingen voor nadere waarschuwingen voordat u dit apparaat gebruikt.
Beschermende aardklem. Het apparaat dient te worden aangesloten op een stopcontact met een beschermend aardcontact.
Har til hensikt å advare brukeren om tilstedeværelse av uisolert “farlig spenning” inne i produktet, som kan ha tilstrekkelig styrke til å medføre risiko for elek-
trisk støt for en person.
Har til hensikt å informere brukeren om tilstedeværelsen av viktige bruks- og vedlikeholds (service)-instruksjoner i litteraturen som følger med produktet.
ADVARSEL: Risiko for elektrisk støt — MÅ IKKE ÅPNES!
ADVARSEL: For å redusere risikoen for elektrisk støt må ikke dekslet fjernes. Det nnes ingen deler på innsiden som brukeren kan justere. Overlat service-
arbeidet til kvalisert servicepersonell.
ADVARSEL: For å hindre elektrisk støt eller brannfare må ikke dette apparatet utsettes for regn eller fuktighet‚ og gjenstander fylt med væske, som en vase,
må ikke settes på apparatet. Før du tar apparatet i bruk må du lese bruksanvisningen for ytterligere advarsler.
Beskyttende jordingsterminal. Apparatet må kobles til en elektrisk kontakt med et støpsel som har skjermet jordkontakt.
KOREAN ARABIC
제품의 케이스 내에 감전을 유발할 있는 절연되지 않은 " 위험한 전압 " 존재함을 사용자에게 립니다 . 제품과 함께 제공되는 인쇄물에 중요
작동 유지 보수 ( 서비스 ) 지침이 있음을 사용자에게 알립 니다 .
주의 : 감전 위험 열지 마십시오 !
주의 : 감전 위험을 낮추기 위해 덮개를 제거하지 마십시오 . 장치 내부에는 사용자가 직접 수리할 있는 부품이 없습니다 . 자격을 갖춘 서비스
원에게 서비스를 의뢰하십시오 .
경고 : 감전 또는 화재 위험을 예방하기 위해 기기를 또는 습기에 노출하거나 꽃병과 같이 액체 들어 있는 물체를 기기 위에 올려놓지
십시오 . 기기를 사용하기 전에 추가 경고 사항에 작동 설명서를 읽어 주십시오 .
보호 접지 단자.장치는 보호 접지 연결 전원 소켓 콘센트에 연결되어야



ريذحت
ريذحت

ريذحت




ريذحت
ريذحت

ريذحت




ريذحت
ريذحت

ريذحت




ريذحت

ريذحت

ريذحت

三角形内带有箭头闪电状符号意在敬告用户,表明产品内部有非绝缘的“危险电压”存在,而且具有足以致人触电的危险。
三角形内的感叹号意在警告用户,表明与机器的操作和维护(维修)有关的重要说明。
警告 触电危险—勿打开!
警告 为了避免触电危险,请勿打开机壳。机内无用户可以维修的部件。需要维修时,请与指定的专业维修人员联系。
警告 为了避免触电或火灾危险,请勿将本机置于雨中或潮湿之处。请勿将装满液体的物体,例如花瓶等置于本机之上。使用本机之前,请仔细阅读本操作说
明书中的安全说明。
保 保护接地端子。设备应该连接到带有保护接地连接的电源插座。
人体へ電気シの危険が考製品筐体内の非絶縁「危険電圧」存在ーザ警告す
製品付属説明書に記載の重要な操作要領の存在ザー警告
注意 電気の危険 — 開い!
注意 電気の危険低減め、バーい。内部部品ザー不可。資格のサー要因要請
さい
警告:電気は火災危険をめ、の装置は湿気 過敏液体を含む装置上に置い
の装置使用警告事項て操作読みい。
保護接地端子。装置は保護接地に接続している電源コンセントに接続する必要があります
CHINESEJAPANESE
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING: When using electrical products, basic cautions should always be followed, including the following:
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
7. Do not block any of the ventilation openings. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than
the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding plug. The wide blade or third prong is provided for your
safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point they exit
from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories provided by the manufacturer.
12. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is
used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such
as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
15. Never break off the ground pin. Write for our free booklet “Shock Hazard and Grounding.” Connect only to a power supply of the
type marked on the unit adjacent to the power supply cord.
16. If this product is to be mounted in an equipment rack, rear support should be provided.
17. Note for UK only: If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the terminals in your plug‚
proceed as follows: a) The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter
E‚ the earth symbol‚ colored green or colored green and yellow. b) The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the
terminal that is marked with the letter N or the color black. c) The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal
that is marked with the letter L or the color red.
18. This electrical apparatus should not be exposed to dripping or splashing and care should be taken not to place objects
containing liquids, such as vases, upon the apparatus.
19. The on/off switch in this unit does not break both sides of the primary mains. Hazardous energy can be present inside the
chassis when the on/off switch is in the off position. The mains plug or appliance coupler is used as the disconnect device, the
disconnect device shall remain readily operable.
20. Exposure to extremely high noise levels may cause a permanent hearing loss. Individuals vary considerably in susceptibility to
noise-induced hearing loss, but nearly everyone will lose some hearing if exposed to sufficiently intense noise for a sufficient
time. The U.S. Government’s Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) has specified the following permissible
noise level exposures:
Duration Per Day In Hours Sound Level dBA, Slow Response
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1 1⁄2 102
1 105
1⁄2 110
1⁄4 or less 115
According to OSHA, any exposure in excess of the above permissible limits could result in some hearing loss. Earplugs or protectors to
the ear canals or over the ears must be worn when operating this amplification system in order to prevent a permanent hearing loss, if
exposure is in excess of the limits as set forth above. To ensure against potentially dangerous exposure to high sound pressure levels, it is
recommended that all persons exposed to equipment capable of producing high sound pressure levels such as this amplification system be
protected by hearing protectors while this unit is in operation.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS!
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES PARA SU SEGURIDAD
CUIDADO: Cuando use productos electrónicos, debe tomar precauciones básicas, incluyendo las siguientes:
1. Lea estas instrucciones.
2. Guarde estas instrucciones.
3. Haga caso de todos los consejos.
4. Siga todas las instrucciones.
5. No usar este aparato cerca del agua.
6. Limpiar solamente con una tela seca.
7. No bloquear ninguna de las salidas de ventilación. Instalar de acuerdo a las instrucciones del fabricante.
8. No instalar cerca de ninguna fuente de calor como radiadores, estufas, hornos u otros aparatos (incluyendo amplificadores) que
produzcan calor.
9. No retire la patilla protectora del enchufe polarizado o de tipo “a Tierra”. Un enchufe polarizado tiene dos puntas, una de ellas
más ancha que la otra. Un enchufe de tipo “a Tierra” tiene dos puntas y una tercera “a Tierra”. La punta ancha (la tercera ) se
proporciona para su seguridad. Si el enchufe proporcionado no encaja en su enchufe de red, consulte a un electricista para
que reemplaze su enchufe obsoleto.
10. Proteja el cable de alimentación para que no sea pisado o pinchado, particularmente en los enchufes, huecos, y los puntos que
salen del aparato.
11. Usar solamente añadidos/accesorios proporcionados por el fabricante.
12. Usar solamente un carro, pie, trípode, o soporte especificado por el fabricante, o vendido junto al aparato. Cuando se use
un carro, tenga cuidado al mover el conjunto carro/aparato para evitar que se dañe en un vuelco. No suspenda esta caja de
ninguna manera.
13. Desenchufe este aparato durante tormentas o cuando no sea usado durante largos periodos de tiempo.
14. Para cualquier reparación, acuda a personal de servicio cualificado. Se requieren reparaciones cuando el aparato ha
sido dañado de alguna manera, como cuando el cable de alimentación o el enchufe se han dañado, algún líquido ha sido
derramado o algún objeto ha caído dentro del aparato, el aparato ha sido expuesto a la lluvia o la humedad, no funciona de
manera normal, o ha sufrido una caída.
15. Nunca retire la patilla de Tierra.Escríbanos para obtener nuestro folleto gratuito “Shock Hazard and Grounding” (“Peligro de
Electrocución y Toma a Tierra”). Conecte el aparato sólo a una fuente de alimentación del tipo marcado al lado del cable de
alimentación.
16. Si este producto va a ser enracado con más equipo, use algún tipo de apoyo trasero.
17. Nota para el Reino Unido solamente: Si los colores de los cables en el enchufe principal de esta unidad no corresponden con
los terminales en su enchufe‚ proceda de la siguiente manera: a) El cable de color verde y amarillo debe ser conectado al
terminal que está marcado con la letra E‚ el símbolo de Tierra (earth)‚ coloreado en verde o en verde y amarillo. b) El cable
coloreado en azul debe ser conectado al terminal que está marcado con la letra N o el color negro. c) El cable coloreado en
marrón debe ser conectado al terminal que está marcado con la letra L o el color rojo.
18. Este aparato eléctrico no debe ser sometido a ningún tipo de goteo o salpicadura y se debe tener cuidado para no poner
objetos que contengan líquidos, como vasos, sobre el aparato.
19. El interruptor de en/lejos en esta unidad no rompe ambos lados de la red primaria. La energía peligrosa puede ser presente
dentro del chasis cuando el interruptor de en/lejos está en el de la posición. El tapón de la red o el acoplador del aparato son
utilizados como el desconecta dispositivo, el desconecta dispositivo se quedará fácilmente operable.
20. La exposición a altos niveles de ruido puede causar una pérdida permanente en la audición. La susceptibilidad a la pérdida de
audición provocada por el ruido varía según la persona, pero casi todo el mundo perderá algo de audición si se expone a un
nivel de ruido suficientemante intenso durante un tiempo determinado. El Departamento para la Salud y para la Seguridad del
Gobierno de los Estados Unidos (OSHA) ha especificado las siguientes exposiciones al ruido permisibles:
Duración por Día en Horas Nivel de Sonido dBA, Respuesta Lenta
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1
1
2
102
1 105
1
2
110
1
4
o menos 115
De acuerdo al OSHA, cualquier exposición que exceda los límites arriba indicados puede producir algún tipo de pérdida en la audición.
Protectores para los canales auditivos o tapones para los oídos deben ser usados cuando se opere con este sistema de sonido para pre-
venir una pérdida permanente en la audición, si la exposición excede los límites indicados más arriba. Para protegerse de una exposición
a altos niveles de sonido potencialmente peligrosa, se recomienda que todas las personas expuestas a equipamiento capaz de producir
altos niveles de presión sonora, tales como este sistema de amplificación, se encuentren protegidas por protectores auditivos mientras esta
unidad esté operando.
GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES!
SPANISH
FRENCH
INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANTES DE SECURITE
ATTENTION: L’utilisation de tout appareil électrique doit être soumise aux precautions d’usage incluant:
1. Lire ces instructions.
2. Gardez ce manuel pour de futures références.
3. Prétez attention aux messages de précautions de ce manuel.
4. Suivez ces instructions.
5. N’utilisez pas cette unité proche de plans d’eau.
6. N’utilisez qu’un tissu sec pour le nettoyage de votre unité.
7. N’obstruez pas les systèmes de refroidissement de votre unité et installez votre unité en fonction des instructions de ce manuel.
8. Ne positionnez pas votre unité à proximité de toute source de chaleur.
9. Connectez toujours votre unité sur une alimentation munie de prise de terre utilisant le cordon d’alimentation fourni.
10. Protégez les connecteurs de votre unité et positionnez les cablages pour éviter toutes déconnexions accidentelles.
11. N’utilisez que des fixations approuvées par le fabriquant.
12. Lors de l’utilsation sur pied ou pole de support, assurez dans le cas de déplacement de l’ensemble enceinte/support de prévenir tout
basculement intempestif de celui-ci.
13. Il est conseillé de déconnecter du secteur votre unité en cas d’orage ou de durée prolongée sans utilisation.
14. Seul un technicien agréé par le fabriquant est à même de réparer/contrôler votre unité. Celle-ci doit être contrôlée si elle a subit des
dommages de manipulation, d’utilisation ou de stockage (humidité,…).
15. Ne déconnectez jamais la prise de terre de votre unité.
16. Si votre unité est destinée a etre montée en rack, des supports arriere doivent etre utilises.
17. Note pour les Royaumes-Unis: Si les couleurs de connecteurs du cable d’alimentation ne correspond pas au guide de la prise
secteur, procédez comme suit: a) Le connecteur vert et jaune doit être connectrer au terminal noté E, indiquant la prise de terre
ou correspondant aux couleurs verte ou verte et jaune du guide. b) Le connecteur Bleu doit être connectrer au terminal noté N,
correspondnat à la couleur noire du guide. c) Le connecteur marron doit être connectrer au terminal noté L, correspondant à la
couleur rouge du guide.
18. Cet équipement électrique ne doit en aucun cas être en contact avec un quelconque liquide et aucun objet contenant un liquide, vase
ou autre ne devrait être posé sur celui-ci. 1
9. L’interrupter (on-off) dans cette unité ne casse pas les deux côtés du primaire principal. L’énergie hasardeuse peut être preésente
dans châssis quand l’interrupter (on-off) est dans le de la position. Le bouchon principal ou atelage d’appareil est utilisé comme le
débrancher l’appareil restera facilement opérable.
20. Une exposition à de hauts niveaux sonores peut conduire à des dommages de l’écoute irréversibles. La susceptibilité au bruit varie
considérablement d’un individu à l’autre, mais une large majorité de la population expériencera une perte de l’écoute après une
exposition à une forte puissance sonore pour une durée prolongée. L’organisme de la santé américaine (OSHA) a produit le guide
ci-dessous en rapport à la perte occasionnée:
Durée par Jour (heures) Niveau sonore moyen (dBA)
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1 1⁄2 102
1 105
1⁄2 110
1⁄4 ou inférieur 115
D’après les études menées par le OSHA, toute exposition au delà des limites décrites ce-dessus entrainera des pertes de l’écoute chez
la plupart des sujets. Le port de système de protection (casque, oreilette de filtrage,…) doit être observé lors de l’opération cette unité ou
des dommages irréversibles peuvent être occasionnés. Le port de ces systèmes doit être observé par toutes personnes susceptibles d’être
exposées à des conditions au delà des limites décrites ci-dessus.
GARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS!
WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
SICHERHEITSHINWEISEACHTUNG: Beim Einsatz von Elektrogeräten müssen u.a. grundlegende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen befolgt werden:
1. Lesen Sie sich diese Anweisungen durch.
2. Bewahren Sie diese Anweisungen auf.
3. Beachten Sie alle Warnungen.
4. Befolgen Sie alle Anweisungen.
5. Setzen Sie dieses Gerät nicht in der Nähe von Wasser ein.
6. Reinigen Sie es nur mit einem trockenen Tuch.
7. Blockieren Sie keine der Lüftungsöffnungen. Führen Sie die Installation gemäß den Anweisungen des Herstellers durch.
8. Installieren Sie das Gerät nicht neben Wärmequellen wie Heizungen, Heizgeräten, Öfen oder anderen Geräten (auch Verstärkern),
die Wärme erzeugen.
9. Beeinträchtigen Sie nicht die Sicherheitswirkung des gepolten Steckers bzw. des Erdungssteckers. Ein gepolter Stecker weist zwei
Stifte auf, von denen einer breiter ist als der andere. Ein Erdungsstecker weist zwei Stifte und einen dritten Erdungsstift auf. Der breite
Stift bzw. der dritte Stift dient Ihrer Sicherheit. Sollte der beiliegende Stecker nicht in Ihre Steckdose passen, wenden Sie sich bitte an
einen Elektriker, um die ungeeignete Steckdose austauschen zu lassen.
10. Schützen Sie das Netzkabel, sodass niemand darauf tritt oder es geknickt wird, insbesondere an Steckern oder Buchsen und ihren
Austrittsstellen aus dem Gerät.
11. Verwenden Sie nur die vom Hersteller erhältlichen Zubehörgeräte oder Zubehörteile.
12. Verwenden Sie nur einen Wagen, Stativ, Dreifuß, Träger oder Tisch, der den Angaben des Herstellers entspricht oder zusammen
mit dem Gerät verkauft wurde. Wird ein Wagen verwendet, bewegen Sie den Wagen mit dem darauf befindlichen Gerät besonders
vorsichtig, damit er nicht umkippt und möglicherweise jemand verletzt wird.
13. Trennen Sie das Gerät während eines Gewitters oder während längerer Zeiträume, in denen es nicht benutzt wird, von der
Stromversorgung.
14. Lassen Sie sämtliche Wartungsarbeiten von qualifizierten Kundendiensttechnikern durchführen. Eine Wartung ist erforderlich, wenn
das Gerät in irgendeiner Art beschädigt wurde, etwa wenn das Netzkabel oder der Netzstecker beschädigt wurden, Flüssigkeit oder
Gegenstände in das Gerät gelangt sind, das Gerät Regen oder Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt wurde, nicht normal arbeitet oder herunt-
ergefallen ist.
15. Der Erdungsstift darf nie entfernt werden. Auf Wunsch senden wir Ihnen gerne unsere kostenlose Broschüre „Shock Hazard and
Grounding“ (Gefahr durch elektrischen Schlag und Erdung) zu. Schließen Sie nur an die Stromversorgung der Art an, die am Gerät
neben dem Netzkabel angegeben ist.
16. Wenn dieses Produkt in ein Geräte-Rack eingebaut werden soll, muss eine Versorgung über die Rückseite eingerichtet werden.
17. Hinweis – Nur für Großbritannien: Sollte die Farbe der Drähte in der Netzleitung dieses Geräts nicht mit den Klemmen in Ihrem
Stecker übereinstimmen, gehen Sie folgendermaßen vor: a) Der grün-gelbe Draht muss an die mit E (Symbol für Erde) markierte
bzw. grüne oder grün-gelbe Klemme angeschlossen werden. b) Der blaue Draht muss an die mit N markierte bzw. schwarze Klemme
angeschlossen werden. c) Der braune Draht muss an die mit L markierte bzw. rote Klemme angeschlossen werden.
18. Dieses Gerät darf nicht ungeschützt Wassertropfen und Wasserspritzern ausgesetzt werden und es muss darauf geachtet werden,
dass keine mit Flüssigkeiten gefüllte Gegenstände, wie z. B. Blumenvasen, auf dem Gerät abgestellt werden.
19. Der Netzschalter in dieser Einheit bricht beide Seiten von den primären Haupleitungen nicht. Gerfährliche Energie kann anwesend
innerhalb des Chassis sein, wenn her Netzschalter im ab Poistion ist. Die Hauptleitungen stöpseln zu oder Gerätkupplung ist benutzt,
während das Vorrichtung abschaltet, das schaltet Vorrichtung wird bleiben sogleich hantierbar ab.
20. Belastung durch extrem hohe Lärmpegel kann zu dauerhaftem Gehörverlust führen. Die Anfälligkeit für durch Lärm bedingten
Gehörverlust ist von Mensch zu Mensch verschieden, das Gehör wird jedoch bei jedem in gewissem Maße geschädigt, der über
einen bestimmten Zeitraum ausreichend starkem Lärm ausgesetzt ist. Die US-Arbeitsschutzbehörde (Occupational and Health
Administration, OSHA) hat die folgenden zulässigen Pegel für Lärmbelastung festgelegt:
Dauer pro Tag in Stunden Geräuschpegel dBA, langsame Reaktion
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1
1
⁄2 102
1 105
1
⁄2 110
1
⁄4oderweniger 115
Laut OSHA kann jede Belastung über den obenstehenden zulässigen Grenzwerten zu einem gewissen Gehörverlust führen. Sollte die Belastung
die obenstehenden Grenzwerte übersteigen, müssen beim Betrieb dieses Verstärkungssystems Ohrenstopfen oder Schutzvorrichtungen im
Gehörgang oder über den Ohren getragen werden, um einen dauerhaften Gehörverlust zu verhindern. Um sich vor einer möglicherweise
gefährlichen Belastung durch hohe Schalldruckpegel zu schützen, wird allen Personen empfohlen, die mit Geräten arbeiten, die wie dieses
Verstärkungssystem hohe Schalldruckpegel erzeugen können, beim Betrieb dieses Geräts einen Gehörschutz zu tragen.
BEWAHREN SIE DIESE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE AUF!
DEUTSCH
TÄRKEÄT TURVALLISUUSOHJEET
1. Lue nämä ohjeet.
2. Säilytä nämä ohjeet.
3. Huomioi kaikki varoitukset.
4. Noudata kaikkia ohjeita.
5. Älä käytä laitetta veden lähellä.
6. Puhdista vain kuivalla kankaalla.
7. Älä tuki mitään tuuletusaukkoja. Asenna valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
8. Älä asenna lämpölähteiden, kuten pattereiden, liesien tai muiden lämpöä tuottavien laitteiden (kuten vahvistinten) lähelle.
9. Älä poista polarisoidun tai maadoitustyyppisen tulpan suojausta. Polarisoidun tulpan toinen napa on leveämpi kuin toinen.
Maadoitustulpassa on kaksi napaa ja kolmas maadoitusnapa. Leveä napa ja maadoitusnapa on tarkoitettu turvaamaan laitteen
käyttöä. Jos mukana toimitettu tulppa ei sovi pistorasiaan, kutsu sähkömies vaihtamaan pistorasia, sillä se on vanhentunut.
10. Suojaa virtajohtoa päälle kävelemiseltä ja nipistykseltä, erityisesti pistotulppien, pistorasioiden sekä laitteen ulosvientien kohdalla.
11. Käytä vain valmistajan toimittamia lisälaitteita.
12. Käytä vain valmistajan määrittämän tai laitteen mukana myydyn vaunun, jalustan, kolmijalan, kiinnikkeen tai pöydän kanssa.
Käytettäessä vaunua liikuta vaunun ja laitteen yhdistelmää varovasti, jotta vältetään loukkaantumiset kaatumisesta johtuen.
13. Irrota laite sähköverkosta ukkosmyrskyjen aikana tai jos laitetta ei käytetä pitkään aikaan.
14. Huoltaminen tulee jättää pätevän huoltohenkilöstön tehtäväksi. Huoltoa tarvitaan, kun laite on jollakin tavoin vioittunut, esim.
virtalähteen johto tai pistoke on vioittunut, laitteen sisään on joutunut nestettä tai esineitä, laite on altistettu sateelle tai kosteudelle,
laite ei toimi normaalisti tai se on pudonnut.
15. Älä koskaan katkaise maadoitusnastaa. Ottamalla meihin yhteyttä saat kirjasen "Sähköiskuvaara ja maadoitus". Kytke vain
virtalähteeseen, joka vastaa laitteen virtajohdon viereen merkittyä tyyppiä.
16. Jos laite kiinnitetään laiteräkkiin, tulee se tukea takaosastaan.
17. Note for UK only: If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the terminals in your plug‚ proceed as
follows:
a) The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter E‚ the earth symbol‚
colored green or colored green and yellow.
b) The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter N or the color black.
c) The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or the color red.
18. Tätä sähkölaitetta ei tule altistaa nestetipoille tai roiskeille, eikä laitteen päälle saa asettaa nestettä sisältäviä esineitä, kuten
maljakoita.
19. Laitteen virtakytkin ei katkaise ensiövirran molempia puolia. Laitteen sisällä voi olla vaarallinen jännite, kun virtakytkin on pois-
asennossa. Virtajohto toimii pääkytkimenä, ja sen pitää olla aina käytettävissä.
20. Altistus erittäin korkeille äänitasoille voi aiheuttaa pysyvän kuulovaurion. Henkilöiden alttius melun aiheuttamille kuulovaurioille
vaihtelee, mutta lähes kaikkien kuulo vaurioituu altistuttaessa riittävän kovalle melulle riittävän kauan. Yhdysvaltain hallituksen
työturvallisuus- ja terveyshallinto (OSHA) on määrittänyt seuraavat hyväksyttävät melutasoaltistukset:
VAARA: Käytettäessä sähkölaitteita tulee aina huomioida mm. seuraavat turvallisuusohjeet:
OSHA:n mukaan altistus yo. tasoja korkeammalle määrälle voi aiheuttaa osittaisen kuulon menetyksen. Käytettäessä vahvistinjärjestelmää
tulee kuulovaurioiden estämiseksi käyttää korvatulppia tai kuulosuojaimia, mikäli altistus ylittää yllä asetetut rajat. Jotta vältetään mahdollisesti
vaarallinen altistus korkeille äänenpaineen tasoille, suositellaan, että kaikki korkeaa äänenpainetta tuottavien laitteiden, kuten tämän
vahvistimen, lähistöllä olevat henkilöt suojaavat kuulonsa, kun laite on käytössä.
Kesto päivää kohti tunteina Äänitaso dBA, hidas vaste
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1 1⁄2 102
1 105
1⁄2 110
1⁄4 tai alle 115
SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET!
FINNISH
VIKTIGA SÄKERHETSINSTRUKTIONER
1. Läs dessa instruktioner.
2. Behåll dessa instruktioner.
3. Iakttag alla varningar.
4. Följ alla instruktioner.
5. Använd inte apparaten i närheten av vatten.
6. Rengör endast med en torr trasa.
7. Blockera inte ventilationsöppningarna. Installera i enlighet med tillverkarens instruktioner.
8. Installera inte i närheten av värmekällor som radiatorer, varmluftsventiler, spisar eller andra apparater (inklusive förstärkare) som ger
ifrån sig värme.
9. Motverka inte säkerhetsfunktionen hos en jordad stickkontakt. En jordad stickkontakt har två stift och metallbleck på sidorna.
Metallblecket finns där för din säkerhet. Kontakta en elektriker för utbyte av det föråldrade vägguttaget om den medföljande
stickkontakten inte passar i ditt vägguttag.
10. Skydda strömsladden från att klivas på eller klämmas, särskilt vid kontakten, grenuttag och platsen där den lämnar apparaten.
11. Använd enbart tillsatser/tillbehör som tillhandahålls av tillverkaren.
12. Använd endast med en kärra, ställ, trefot, fäste eller bord i enlighet med tillverkarens specikationer, eller som säljs tillsammans med
apparaten. Var försiktig när du använder en kärra så att inga personskador uppstår på grund av att kombinationen kärra-apparat
välter när den yttas.
13. Koppla ur apparaten vid åskväder eller när den inte används under en längre tid.
14. Låt kvalicerad servicepersonal sköta all service. Service krävs om apparaten har skadats på något vis, till exempel om strömsladden
eller stickkontakten har skadats, vätska har spillts eller föremål har fallit ner i apparaten, apparaten har utsatts för regn eller fukt, inte
fungerar normalt eller har tappats.
15. Anslut aldrig till ojordade uttag. Skriv till oss för vårt gratishäfte ”Stötrisk och jordning”. Anslut endast till en strömkälla av samma typ
som enhetens märkning anger (bredvid strömsladden).
16. Om produkten ska monteras i ett utrustningsrack bör bakre stöd användas.
17. Note for UK only: If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the terminals in your plug‚ proceed as
follows:
a) The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter E‚ the earth symbol‚
colored green or colored green and yellow.
b) The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter N or the color black.
c) The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or the color red.
18. Denna elektriska apparat bör inte utsättas för dropp eller stänk och försiktighet bör iakttas så att inte föremål som innehåller vätskor,
såsom vaser, placeras ovanpå apparaten.
19. Enhetens strömbrytare bryter inte båda sidor av strömkretsen. Farlig energi kan förekoma inuti höljet när strömbrytaren är i av-läget.
Stickkontakten eller apparatkontakten fungerar som bortkopplingsenhet, bortkopplingsenheten ska hållas lättillgänglig.
20. Extremt höga ljudnivåer kan orsaka permanent hörselskada. Olika personer skiljer sig åt i benägenhet att hörselskador av
oljud, men i princip alla får hörselskador om de utsätts för tillräckligt höga ljud under tillräcklig tid. Den amerikanska regeringens
arbetsskydds- och hälsoförvaltning (OSHA) har angivit följande maxnivåer för tillåten exponering för oljud:
VARNING: När du använder elektriska produkter ska grundläggande försiktighetsåtgärder iakttas, inklusive följande:
Enligt OSHA kan exponering utöver ovanstående tillåtna gränser orsaka hörselskador. Öronproppar eller skydd för hörselgången eller
över öronen måste bäras när detta förstärkarsystem används för att förebygga permanenta hörselskador, om exponeringen överskrider
gränsvärdena enligt ovan. För att skydda mot potentiellt farlig exponering för höga ljudtrycksnivåer rekommenderas det att personer
som exponeras för utrustning som kan producera höga ljudtrycksnivåer såsom detta förstärkarsystem skyddas med hörselskydd när
enheten är i drift.
Längd per dag i timmar Ljudnivå dBA, långsam svarstid
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1 1⁄2 102
1 105
1⁄2 110
1⁄4 eller mindre 115
SPARA DESSA INSTRUKTIONER!
SWEDISH
NORWEGIAN
VIKTIGE SIKKERHETSINSTRUKSJONER
ADVARSEL: Ved bruk av et elektrisk apparat må grunnleggende forsiktighetsregler følges, inklusive de følgende:
1. Les disse instruksjonene.
2. Ta vare på disse instruksjonene.
3. Følg alle advarslene.
4. Følg alle instruksjoner.
5. Ikke bruk apparatet i nærheten av vann.
6. Rengjør bare med en tørr klut.
7. Ikke blokker noen av ventilasjonsåpningene. Installer i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.
8. Ikke installer i nærheten av en varmekilde som radiatorer, varmekanaler, ovn er eller andre apparater (inklusive forsterkere) som
utvikler varme.
9. Ikke reduserer sikkerhetshensiktene med polariserte eller jordede støpsler. Et polarisert støpsel har to blader, der det ene er
bredere enn det andre. Et støpsel med jording har to blader og en tredje jordingsplugg. Det brede bladet eller den tredje pluggen
er der for å gi deg beskyttelse. Hvis det medfølgende støpslet ikke passer inn i den elektriske kontakten der du bor, kontakt en
elektriker for å få støpslet skiftet.
10. Beskytt den elektriske ledningen mot å bli trådt på eller klemt, spesielt ved støpslet, stikkontakten og punktet der den kommer ut
av apparatet.
11. Bruk bare tilkoblinger/tilbehør som er levert av produsenten.
12. Bruk bare med vogn, stativ, tripod, brakett eller bord spesisert av produsenten eller solgt sammen med apparatet. Når det be-
nyttes en vogn, vis forsiktighet når vogn/apparat yttes for å unngå skade som følge av et velt.
13. Trekk ut ledningen til apparatet under tordenvær eller når det skal stå ubrukt over en lengre periode.
14. Overlat servicearbeidet til kvalisert servicepersonell. Service er påkrevet når apparatet har vært utsatt for skade, som at den
elektriske ledningen eller støpslet er skadet, væske er blitt sølt over apparatet eller en gjenstand har falt ned i apparatet, appara-
tet har vært utsatt for regn eller fuktighet, at det ikke virker normalt eller har falt i gulvet.
15. Bryt aldri av jordingspinnen. Skriv etter gratis hefte “Shock Hazard and Grounding” (Fare for elektrisk støt og jording). Tilkoble
bare elektriske anlegg av den typen som er angitt på enheten ved siden av den elektriske ledningen.
16. Hvis dette produktet skal plasseres i en utstyrsreol må det etableres støtte på baksiden.
17. Note for UK only: If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the terminals in your plug‚ pro-
ceed as follows: a) The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter E‚ the
earth symbol‚ colored green or colored green and yellow. b) The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the terminal that
is marked with the letter N or the color black. c) The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked
with the letter L or the color red.
18. Dette elektriske apparatet må ikke utsettes for drypp eller sprut fra væske, og det må utvises forsiktighet slik at det ikke plasseres
gjenstander fylt med vann - som en vase - på apparatet.
19. På/av-bryteren på denne enheten bryter ikke begge sider av den primære strømkretsen. Farlig strøm kan nnes på innsiden av
chassiset også når På/Av-bryteren er i posisjon Av. Det elektriske støpslet eller utstyrskoblingen brukes som frakoblingsutstyr,
frakoblingsutstyret skal være lett å komme til og bruke.
20. Eksponering mot ekstremt høyt støynivå kan føre til permanent tap av hørsel. Det er betydelige individuelle forskjeller hva gjelder
den enkeltes ømntlighet hva gjelder støypåført tap av hørsel, men nesten alle vil tape noe hørsel dersom de utsettes for tilstrek-
kelig intens støy over en tilstrekkelig lang periode. U.S. Governments Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) har
spesisert følgende tillatte støynivåeksponeringer:
Varighet pr. dag i timer Lydnivå dBA, sakte respons
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1 1⁄2 102
1 105
1⁄2 110
1⁄4 eller mindre 115
I henhold til OSHA vil enhver eksponering ut over de ovenstående tillatte grensene kunne føre til noe tap av hørsel. Ørepropper eller
beskyttelse av ørekanalene eller over ørene må anvendes når dette forsterkersystemet brukes for å hindre permanent tap av hørsel
dersom eksponeringen overskrider grensene som vises ovenfor. For å beskytte mot potensielt farlig eksponering til høyt lydtrykknivåer
anbefales det at alle personer som eksponeres mot utstyr som er i stand til å produsere høye lydtrykknivåer som dette forsterkersyste-
met må beskyttes av hørselsvern mens denne enheten er i bruk.
OPPBEVAR DISSE INSTRUKSJONENE
DUTCH
BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSINSTRUCTIES
WAARSCHUWING: Bij gebruik van elektrische producten, moeten elementaire voorzorgsmaatregelen altijd worden opgevolgd, waaron-
der het volgende:
1. Lees deze gebruiksaanwijzing.
2. Bewaar deze gebruiksaanwijzing.
3. Besteed aandacht aan alle waarschuwingen.
4. Volg alle instructies op.
5. Gebruik dit apparaat niet in de buurt van water.
6. Reinig het alleen met een droge doek.
7. Blokkeer geen ventilatieopeningen. Installeer volgens de instructies van de fabrikant.
8. Installeer niet in de buurt van warmtebronnen zoals radiatoren, kachels, ovens of andere apparaten (inclusief versterkers) die
warmte produceren.
9. Omzeil nooit de veiligheidsvoorziening van de gepolariseerde of geaarde stekker. Een gepolariseerde stekker heeft twee bladen,
waarvan er één breder is dan de andere. Een geaarde stekker heeft twee bladen en een derde aardingspen. Het bredere blad
of de derde pen is bedoeld voor uw veiligheid. Mocht de geleverde stekker niet in uw stopcontact passen, raadpleeg dan een
elektricien voor het vervangen van het verouderde stopcontact.
10. Bescherm het netsnoer zodat er niet over gelopen kan worden of bekneld kan raken, vooral bij stekkers, stopcontacten en het
punt waar ze het apparaat verlaten.
11. Gebruik alleen aansluitstukken/accessoires geleverd door de fabrikant.
12. Gebruik uitsluitend een wagentje, standaard, statief, beugel of tafel die door de fabrikant wordt aanbevolen of bij het apparaat
wordt verkocht. Wanneer u een wagentje gebruikt, wees dan voorzichtig bij het verplaatsen van de combinatie wagen/apparaat
en voorkom letsel door omvallen.
13. Haal de stekker van dit apparaat uit het stopcontact tijdens bliksem of wanneer het apparaat gedurende lange perioden niet
gebruikt wordt.
14. Laat al het onderhoud uitvoeren door gekwaliceerd onderhoudspersoneel. Onderhoud is nodig wanneer het apparaat op enige
wijze beschadigd is, zoals het netsnoer of de stekker is beschadigd, er vloeistof in het apparaat is gemorst of voorwerpen in zijn
terechtgekomen, het apparaat aan regen of vocht is blootgesteld, niet normaal werkt, of is gevallen.
15. Breek nooit de aardingspen af. Raadpleeg ons gratis boekje “Schokgevaar en aarding”. Sluit alleen op een voedingsspanning
aan van het type aangegeven op het apparaat naast het netsnoer.
16. Als dit product in een apparatuurrek gemonteerd moet worden, moet voor achterondersteuning worden verzorgd.
17. Note for UK only: If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the terminals in your plug‚ pro-
ceed as follows: a) The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter E‚ the
earth symbol‚ colored green or colored green and yellow. b) The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the terminal that
is marked with the letter N or the color black. c) The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked
with the letter L or the color red.
18. Dit elektrisch apparaat mag niet aan druip- of spatwater worden blootgesteld en er moet op gelet worden dat geen voorwerpen
gevuld met vloeistoffen, zoals vazen, op het apparaat worden geplaatst.
19. De aan/uit-schakelaar van dit apparaat onderbreekt niet beide contacten van het lichtnet. Gevaarlijke spanning kan binnenin het
chassis aanwezig zijn ondanks dat de aan/uit-schakelaar op uit staat. De stekker van het apparaat wordt gebruikt als onderbre-
kingsmechanisme, het onderbrekingsmechanisme dient eenvoudig bedienbaar te blijven.
20. Blootstelling aan extreem hoge geluidsniveaus kan permanent gehoorverlies veroorzaken. Individuen verschillen in gevoeligheid
voor gehoorverlies door lawaai geïnduceerd, maar bijna iedereen zal enig gehoor verliezen indien voor een bepaalde duur aan
voldoende intens lawaai blootgesteld. De Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) van de Amerikaanse regering
heeft de volgende blootstellingen aan toelaatbaar lawaainiveau gespeciceerd:
Duur per dag In uren Geluidsniveau dBA, trage reactie
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1 1⁄2 102
1 105
1⁄2 110
1⁄4 of minder 115
Volgens OSHA, kan elke blootstelling boven de bovengenoemde toelaatbare grenswaarden tot enige gehoorverlies leiden. Oordoppen of
-beschermers in de oorkanalen of over de oren moeten bij het bedienen van dit versterkersysteem worden gedragen om een permanent
gehoorverlies te voorkomen, indien blootstelling boven de grenzen zoals hierboven zijn vermeld. Om potentieel gevaarlijke blootstelling
aan hoge geluidsdruk te voorkomen, is het raadzaam om alle personen die aan apparatuur worden blootgesteld die in staat is om hoge
geluidsdruk te produceren, zoals dit versterkersysteem, met gehoorbeschermers te beschermen wanneer dit apparaat in bedrijf is.
BEWAAR DEZE INSTRUCTIES!
ITALIAN
IMPORTANTI NORME DI SICUREZZA:
ATTENZIONE: Durante uso di apparecchiature elettriche vanno osservate alcune precauzioni basilari, tra cui le seguenti:
1. Leggete queste istruzioni.
2. Conservate le istruzioni.
3. Rispettate tutte le avvertenze.
4. Seguite le istruzioni.
5. Non usate questo prodotto vicino all’acqua.
6. Pulite esclusivamente con un panno asciutto.
7. Non ostruite le fessure di ventilazione. Installate il dispositivo seguendo le istruzioni del produttore.
8. Il prodotto va collocato lontano da sorgenti di calore quali radiatori, pompe di calore, stufe o altri dispositivi che generano calore
(compresi gli amplificatori).
9. Non eliminate i dispositivi di sicurezza come spine polarizzate o con messa a terra. La spina polarizzata ha due lame, una
più grande dell’altra. La spina con messa a terra ha due contatti più un terzo per la terra. Il contatto più largo o terzo polo è
indispensabile per la vostra sicurezza. Se la spina fornita non adatta alla vostra presa, mettetevi in contatto con un elettricista
per la sostituzione della presa obsoleta.
10. Fate attenzione a non camminare o incastrare il cavo di alimentazione, soprattutto in prossimità della spina o del punto in cui si
collega all’apparecchiatura.
11. Usate solo accessori originali forniti dal costruttore.
12. L’apparato va usato esclusivamente con il supporto indicato dal produttore o venduto con l’apparato. Se intendete adoperare un
carrello su ruote, fate attenzione quando spostate apparecchio e supporto per evitare che la loro caduta possa causare danni a
cose o persone.
13. Scollegatelo l’apparecchio dalla presa di corrente durante un temporale con fulmini o quando non s’intende usare per un lungo
periodo.
14. L’assistenza va eseguita esclusivamente da personale autorizzato. È necessario ricorrere all’assistenza se il dispositivo ha
subito danni, per esempio si sono rovinati il cavo di alimentazione o la spina, all’interno è caduto del liquido o un oggetto, il
dispositivo è rimasto esposto alla pioggia o all’umidità, non funziona normalmente o è caduto a terra.
15 Non rimuovete lo spinotto della terra. Collegate il dispositivo esclusivamente a una presa di corrente del tipo indicato accanto
alla targhetta posta vicino al cavo di alimentazione.
16. Se questo prodotto deve essere montato a rack, è necessario sostenerlo anche nella parte posteriore.
17. Nota per UK: Se i colori dei fili nel cavo di alimentazione per questa unità non corrispondono con i terminali della vostra spina,
procedere come segue: a) Il filo di colore verde/giallo deve essere collegato al terminale che marcato con lettera E, o simbolo di
terra, o colore verde o verde/giallo. b) Il filo di colore blu deve essere collegato al terminale marcato con la lettera N o di colore
Nero. c) Il filo di colore marrone deve essere collegato al terminale marcato con la lettera L o di colore Rosso.
18. Questo apparato elettrico non deve essere esposto a gocce o schizzi, va in ogni caso evitato di appoggiare oggetti contenenti
liquidi, come bicchieri, sull'apparecchio.
19. L'interruttore on/off in questa unità non interrompe entrambi i lati della rete di alimentazione. All'interno dell'apparecchio può
essere presente elettricità anche con interruttore on/off in posizione off. La spina o il cavo di alimentazione è utilizzato come
sezionatore, il dispositivo di sezionamento deve restare sempre operativo.
20. L’esposizione a livelli di volume molto elevati può causare la perdita permanente dell’udito. La predisposizione alla perdita
dell’udito causata da livelli elevati di volume varia notevolmente da persona a persona, ma quasi tutti subiscono una perdita di
udito almeno parziale se soggetti a volume di livello elevato per un tempo sufficientemente lungo. L’ufficio Lavoro e Salute del
governo degli USA (OSHA) ha elaborato la seguente tabella di tolleranza ai rumori:
Esposizione giornaliera in ore Livello sonoro dBA, Slow response
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1 1⁄2 102
1 110
1⁄4 o minore 115
Secondo l’OSHA, l’esposizione a livelli di volume al di sopra dei limiti stabiliti può causare una perdita almeno parziale dell’udito. Quando
si adopera questo sistema di amplificazione, è necessario indossare auricolari o apposite protezioni per il condotto auditivo, per evitare la
perdita permanente dell’udito se l’esposizione supera i limiti sopra riportati.Per evitare di esporvi al rischio di danni derivanti da elevati livelli
di pressione sonora, si raccomanda di adoperare delle protezioni per gli orecchi quando si usano attrezzature in grado di produrre elevati
livelli sonori, come quest’amplificatore.
CONSERVATE QUESTE ISTRUZIONI!
PORTUGUESE
INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA
1. Leia estas instruções.
2. Mantenha estas instruções.
3. Preste atenção a todas as advertências.
4. Siga todas as instruções.
5. Não use este aparelho perto d’água.
6. Limpe somente com um pano seco.
7. Não obstrua nenhuma das aberturas de ventilação. Instale de acordo com as instruções do fabricante.
8. Não instale perto de nenhuma fonte de calor tais como radiadores, registros de calor, fogões ou outros aparelhos (incluindo
amplicadores) que produzam calor.
9. Não desae o propósito de segurança do plugue polarizado ou do tipo aterrado. Um plugue polarizado tem duas lâminas com uma
mais larga que a outra. Um plugue do tipo aterrado tem duas lâminas e um terceiro plugue terra. A lâmina larga ou o terceiro pino
são fornecidos para sua segurança. Se o plugue disponibilizado não couber em sua tomada, consulte um eletricista para troca da
tomada obsoleta.
10. Proteja o cabo de energia para não ser pisado ou espremido principalmente em plugues, recipientes e o ponto de onde sai do
aparelho.
11. Use apenas conexões/acessórios fornecidos pelo fabricante.
12. Use apenas um carrinho, banqueta, tripé, suporte, ou mesa especicado pelo fabricante, ou vendido com o aparelho. Quando um
carrinho for usado, tome cuidado ao mover a combinação carrinho/aparelho para evitar ferimentos por tombamento.
13. Tire esse aparelho da tomada durante tempestades de raios ou quando for car sem usar por longos períodos de tempo.
14. Entregue todos os consertos apenas a pessoal qualificado. O conserto é necessário quando o aparelho tiver sofrido qualquer
dano, tais como o cabo de energia ou plugue estiverem danicados, líquidos tenham sido derramados ou objetos tenham caído no
aparelho, o aparelho tenha sido submetido à chuva ou umidade, não funcionar normalmente, ou tenha sido deixado cair.
15. Nunca quebre fora o pino terra. Escreva pedindo nosso livreto grátis “Perigos de Choque e Aterramento.” Ligue apenas a um
suprimento de energia do tipo marcado na unidade adjacente ao o de fornecimento de energia.
16. Se este produto for ser montado em uma estante para equipamentos, deve ser montado um suporte traseiro.
17. Note for UK only: If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the terminals in your plug‚ proceed as
follows:
a) The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter E‚ the earth symbol‚
colored green or colored green and yellow.
b) The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter N or the color black.
c) The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or the color red.
18. Este aparelho elétrico não deve ser exposto a pingos ou respingos e deve ser tomado cuidado para não colocar objetos contendo
líquidos, tais como vasos, sobre o aparelho.
19. O comutador liga/desliga nesta unidade não interrompe ambos os lados da rede elétrica primária. Energia perigosa pode estar
presente dentro do chassi quando o comutador liga/desliga estiver na posição desligado. O plugue de alimentação ou um dispositivo
de união é usado como dispositivo de desligamento, o dispositivo de desligamento deve permanecer pronto para funcionar.
20. Exposição a níveis de barulho extremamente altos podem causar perda permanente de audição. As pessoas variam
consideravelmente em susceptibilidade a perda de audição causada por ruídos, mas quase todo mundo vai perder algo da audição
se exposto a ruído sucientemente intenso por tempo suciente. A Administração de Segurança Ocupacional e Saúde americana
(OSHA) especicou os seguintes níveis permissíveis de exposição a ruído:
ADVERTÊNCIA: Ao usar eletrodomésticos, precauções básicas devem sempre ser seguidas, incluindo as seguintes:
De acordo com a OSHA, qualquer exposição excedente aos limites permissíveis acima pode resultar em alguma perda de audição. Tampões de
ouvido ou protetores sobre os canais do ouvido ou sobre as orelhas precisam ser usados ao operar este sistema de amplicação para poder evitar
uma perda permanente de audição, se a exposição for em excesso aos limites acima estabelecidos. Para assegurar contra exposição perigosa
potencial a níveis de alta pressão de ruído, é recomendado que todas as pessoas expostas a equipamento capaz de produzir níveis de alta pressão
de ruído tais como este sistema de amplicação estejam protegidas por protetores de ouvido enquanto esta unidade estiver em funcionamento.
Duração Por Dia Em Horas dBA de Nível de Som, Resposta Lenta
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1 1⁄2 102
1 105
1⁄2 110
1⁄4 ou menos 115
GUARDE ESSAS INSTRUÇÕES!
安全のの重要事項
警告: 電気製品使用は、の項基本的な注意事項
1. 本書の指示内容
2. 本書保管
3. ての さい
4. ての ださい
5. 本装置水ので使用い。
6. お手れには乾いた布をお使いい。
7. くだ してくだ
8. ()、発熱体の設置い。
9.
分極や接地の安全性い。分極2つは、一方が幅広
接地式2つ接地グが幅広のや接地は安全所定の
グがい場合、式のの交換技術者合わい。
10.
電源保護い。装置か部分保護い。
11. 備品/付属品ーの使用い。
12.
三脚、ー指定のの、装置販売使用い。
使用は、装置横転注意
13. 落雷の恐嵐のは長期間使本装置の電源い。
14.
保守作業資格の担当依頼い。保守作業が必要には、装置が故障場合、ば、電源
が破損、装置液体が物が落湿度の影響受け正常動作落下場合
15.
(接地は決い。「感電接地」入手い。装置の電源の横
記載プの電源接続
16. 本製品載せ場合は背面支持が必要
17. Note for UK only: If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the terminals in your plug‚ proceed as
follows: a) The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter E‚ the earth symbol‚
colored green or colored green and yellow. b) The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter
N or the color black. c) The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or the color red.
18. 電気機器がかい。花瓶液体の装置置か注意
19.
/主電源のの側切断/オがオ位置の内部(高電圧)
危険主電源は機器が切断装置切断装置は動作使用状態に
して
20.
騒音聴覚永久原因に騒音に聴覚障害可能性はが、
騒音十分長時間浴場合ぼす人が何の障害米国労働安全衛生庁 (OSHA) は、許容
(騒音暴露ル)次の
1の時間 レベルdBA、
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1½ 102
1 105
½ 110
1⁄4以下 115
OSHA上記許容限度場合は聴覚障害の原因騒音が上記限度を場合は、永久的な聴覚障害をめ、
の操作時外耳道は耳全体装着必要が高音圧危険な状態め、
高音圧機器に触れ人は本機使用聴覚保護
本書は保管い!
JAPANESE
重要安全事项
1. 阅读说明书。
2. 妥善保管说明书。
3. 注意所有安全警告。
4. 按照要求和指示操作。
5. 请勿在靠近水(或其它液体)的地方使用本机。
6. 本机只能用干燥布料擦拭。
7. 请勿遮盖任何通散热口。确实依照本说明书安装本机。
8. 请勿将本机安装在任何热源附近,例如电暖器、蓄热器件、火炉或其他发热电器(包括功率放大器)
9. 请勿破坏两脚型插头或接地型插头的安全装置。两脚型插头有两个不同宽度的插头片,一个窄,另一个宽一点。接地型插头有两个相同
的插头片和一个接地插脚。两脚型插头中宽的插头片和接地型插头接地插脚起着保障安全的作用。如果所附带的插头规格与您的插座不
匹配,请让电工更换插座以保证安全。
10. 请勿踩踏或挤压电源线,尤其是插头、插座、设备电源输入接口或者电源线和机身连接处。
11. 本机只可以使用制造商指定的零件 / 配件。
12. 本机只可以使用与本机搭售或由制造商指定的机柜、支架、三角架、托架或桌子。使用机柜时,请小心移动已安装设备的机柜,以避免
机会推翻造成身体伤害。
13. 在雷雨天或长期不使用的情况下,请拔掉电源插头。
14. 所有检查与维修都必须由指定的专业维修人员进行。如本机的任何形式的损伤都须检修,例如电源线或插头受损,有液体或物体落入机
身内,曾暴露于雨天或潮湿的地方,不能正常运作,或曾掉落后损坏等。
15. 不得拔出接地插脚。请写信索取免费手册《 Shock Hazard and Grounding》。使用前,请仔细检查确认所使用的电源电压是否匹配设备
上标注的额定电压。
16. 如果本机装在机柜中 , 其后部也应给予相应的支撑固定。
17.
Note for UK only: If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the terminals in your plug‚ proceed as
follows:
a) The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter E‚ the earth symbol‚
colored green or colored green and yellow.
b) The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter N or the color black.
c) The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or the color red.
18. 本机不得暴露于滴水或溅水中。请勿将诸如花瓶等装有液体的物体放置于本机上。
19. 本机电源开关不能同时断开两端的电源,完全切断外部电源。因此当开关位于“OFF”位置时,本机外壳仍有可能带有触电的危险。电
源插头或耦合器能够与设备或者电源容易分开,保证电源的完全切断,从而保证安全。
20. 声压级较高的噪音容易造成听力的永久性损失。因噪声而造成的听力损失程度 , 个体间的差异较大 , 但几乎每个人在声压级较高的噪音
环境里一定时间,都会有不同程度的听力损失。美国政府职业安全与保健管理局(OSHA)就此规定了下列容许噪声级 :
警告 :操作电器产品时,请务必遵守基本安全注意事项,包括 :
OSHA, 任何超出以上所允许的范围 , 都会造成部分听力的损失。使用本功放系统时,必须佩戴如耳塞等保护耳朵的器件,防止长时间处于上述
限制级以上的环境而引起永久性听力受损。本机运行时,如果超过上述所规定的最大限制,为了抵御较高的声压对于听受损所造成的潜在危险,建
议使用诸如功放系统等引起高声压级噪声的所有人均佩戴保护耳朵的器件。
每天持续小时数 声压级(dBA)慢反应
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
1
½
102
1 105
½
110
¼
或更少 115
请妥善保管本说明书!
CHINESE
중요 안전 지침
경고: 전기 제품 사용 다음 사항을 포함해 기본적인 주의 사항을 항상 따라야 합니다.
1. 지침을 읽어 주십시오.
2. 지침을 준수하여 주십시오.
3. 모든 경고 사항에 주의해 주십시오.
4. 모든 지침을 따라 주십시오.
5. 물기가 있는 근처에서 기기를 사용하지 마십시오.
6. 마른 헝겊으로만 청소해 주십시오.
7. 통풍구를 막지 마십시오. 제조업체의 지침에 따라 설치해 주십시오.
8. 라디에이터, 가열기, 난로 또는 열을 발산하는 기타 기기(앰프 포함) 근처에 설치하지 마십시오.
9. 극성 플러그나 접지형 플러그의 안전 용도를 무시하지 마십시오. 극성 플러그는 한쪽 날이 다른 쪽보다 넓습니다. 접지형
플러그에는 2개의 날과 1개의 접지 플러그가 있습니다. 넓은 또는 1개의 접지 플러그는 안전을
위해 제공됩니다. 제공된
플러그가 사용자의 콘센트에 맞지 않으면 구식 콘센트의 교체에 대해 전기 기술자에게 문의하십시오.
10. 전원 코드 특히, 플러그, 소켓 기기에서 나오는 지점이 밟히거나 집히지 않도록 보호하십시오.
11. 제조업체에서 제공하는 부착 장치/액세서리만을 사용하십시오.
12. 제조업체에서 지정하거나 기기와 함께 판매되는 카트, 스탠드, 삼각대, 브래킷 또는 테이블만을 사용하십시오. 카트 사용
카트/기기 결합물을 움직일 전복으로 인해 부상을 입지 않도록 주의해 주십시오.
13. 번개와 폭풍이 그리고 장기간 사용하지 않을 때는 기기의 플러그를 뽑아 놓으십시오.
14. 자격을 갖춘 서비스 요원에게 모든 서비스를 의뢰하십시오. 전원 공급 코드 또는 플러그가 손상되거나 액체
엎지르거나
안에 이물질을 떨어뜨리거나 또는 습기에 기기를 노출하거나 정상적으로 작동하지 않거나 기기를 떨어뜨린 경우와
기기가 손상된 경우에는 서비스를 받아야 합니다.
15. 접지 핀을 제거하지 마십시오. 당사의 무료 소책자인 감전 위험 접지 우편으로 주문해 주십시오. 전원 공급 코드의
기에 표시된 유형의 전원 공급 장치만 연결해 주십시오.
16. 제품을 장비 랙에 장착할 경우에는 후면 지지대를 설비해야 합니다.
17. Note for UK only: If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the terminals in your plug‚ proceed as
follows: a) The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter E‚ the earth symbol‚
colored green or colored green and yellow. b) The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter
N or the color black. c) The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or the color red.
18.
전기 기기가 비나 물방울에 노출되지 않도록 주의하고 꽃병과 같이 용액이 들어 있는 물체를 기기 위에 놓지 않도록 주의해
주십시오.
19. 기기의 ON/OFF 스위치는 양쪽의 기기 전원을 차단하지 않습니다. ON/OFF 스위치가
OFF 위치에 있더라도 섀시 내부
위험한 전기가 흐를 있습니다. 기본 플러그 또는 기기 커플러는 분리 장치로 사용됩니다. 분리 장치는 바로 사용 가능
상태로 두어야 합니다.
20. 매우 높은 소음에 노출되면 영구적으로 청각이 손상될 있습니다. 소음으로 인한 청각 손상 가능성은 개인별로 매우 다르
지만 장시간 매우 강한 소음에 노출되면 거의 모든 사람들에게 어느 정도의 청각 손상이 발생합니다. 미국 정부의 OSHA(
안전 건강 관리국) 다음과 같이 용인 가능한 소음 노출을 규정하고 있습니다.
일별 지속 시간 소음 수준 dBA, 저속 반응
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
102
1 105
½ 110
¼ 이하 115
OSHA 따르면 용인 가능한 제한 수치를 초과하여 노출된 경우 일부 청각이 손상될 있습니다. 위에 명시된 제한치를 초과하여
노출되는 경우 영구적인 청각 손상을 예방하려면 앰프 시스템 사용 귀마개 또는 전체를 덮는 보호구를 착용해야 합니다.
재적으로 위험한 높은 음압에 노출되지 않도록 하려면 앰프 시스템과 같이 높은 음압을 생성할 있는 장비에 노출되는 모든 사람
기기가 작동하는 동안 청각 보호구를 착용하는 것이 좋습니다.
지침을 보관해 주십시오!
KOREAN
ARABIC
ﺔﻤﻬﻤﻟﺍ ﻥﺎﻣﻷﺍ ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺗ
.ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﻩﺬﻫ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ .1
.ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﻩﺬﻫ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻅﺎﻔﺤﻟﺍ .2
.ﺕﺍﺮﻳﺬﺤﺘﻟﺍ ﻊﻴﻤﺠﻟ ﻩﺎﺒﺘﻧﻻﺍ .3
.ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﻩﺬﻫ ﻉﺎﺒﺗﺍ .4
.ءﺎﻤﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺔﺑﺮﻘﻣ ﻰﻠﻋ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻡﺪﻋ .5
.ﺔﻓﺎﺟ ﺵﺎﻤﻗ ﺔﻌﻄﻘﺑ ﻂﻘﻓ ﻒﻈﻨﻳ .6
.ﻊﻨﺼﻤﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟ ﺎﻘﻓﻭ ﺖﻴﺒﺜﺘﻟﺍ ﻢﺘﻳ .ﺔﻳﻮﻬﺗ ﺕﺎﺤﺘﻓ ﻱﺃ ﺪﺴﺑ ﻢﻘﺗ .7
.ﺓﺭﺍﺮﺣ ﺎﻬﻨﻋ ﺭﺪﺼﻳ ﻲﺘﻟﺍ (ﺕﻮﺼﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺮﺒﻜﻣ ﺎﻬﻴﻓ ﺎﻤﺑ) ﻯﺮﺧﺃ ﺓﺰﻬﺟﺃ ﻱﺃ ﻭﺃ ﺪﻗﺍﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ،ﺕﺂﻓﺪﻤﻟﺍﻭ ،ﺕﺍﺩﺮﺒﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﺜﻣ ﺓﺭﺍﺮﺣ ﺭﺩﺎﺼﻣ ﻱﺃ ﻦﻣ ﺏﺮﻘﻟﺎﺑ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﻊﻀﺗ .8
ﻲﺿﺭﺃ ﺲﺑﺎﻗﻭ ﻥﺎﻨﺳ ﻪﺑ ﻲﺿﺭﻷﺍ ﻉﻮﻨﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺲﺑﺎﻘﻟﺍ .ﻲﻧﺎﺜﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺽﺮﻋﺃ ﺎﻤﻫﺪﺣﺃ ﻥﺎﻨﺳ ﻪﺑ ﻲﺒﻄﻘﻟﺍ ﺲﺑﺎﻘﻟﺍ .ﻲﺿﺭﻷﺍ ﻉﻮﻨﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﻭﺃ ﻲﺒﻄﻘﻟﺍ ءﺎﺑﺮﻬﻜﻟﺍ ﺲﺑﺎﻗ ﻥﺎﻣﺃ ﻦﻣ ﺽﺮﻐﻟﺍ ﻞﺸﻓ ﻲﻓ ﺐﺒﺴﺘﺗ .9
.ﻢﻳﺪﻘﻟﺍ ﺲﺒﻘﻤﻟﺍ ﻝﺍﺪﺒﺘﺳﻻ ءﺎﺑﺮﻬﻛ ﻲﻨﻓ ﺮﺸﺘﺳﺍ ،ﻚﺑ ﺹﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﻂﺋﺎﺤﻟﺍ ﺲﺒﻘﻣ ﺚﻟﺎﺜﻟﺍ ﺲﺑﺎﻘﻟﺍ ﺐﺳﺎﻨﻳ ﻢﻟ ﺍﺫﺇ .ﻚﺘﻣﻼﺳ ﻞﺟﺃ ﻦﻣ ﺚﻟﺎﺜﻟﺍ ﻦﺴﻟﺍ ﺮﻴﻓﻮﺗ ﻢﺘﻳ ﻭﺃ ﺔﻀﻳﺮﻋ ﻦﺴﺑ ﺩﻭﺰﻣ ﺲﺑﺎﻘﻟﺍ .ﺚﻟﺎﺛ
.ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺎﻬﺟﻭﺮﺧ ﻊﺿﻮﻣﻭ ،ﺔﻤﺋﻼﻤﻟﺍ ﺲﺑﺎﻘﻤﻟﺍﻭ ،ﺲﺑﺍﻮﻘﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﺔﺻﺎﺧ ،ﻪﻄﻐﺿ ﻭﺃ ﻪﻴﻠﻋ ﻲﺸﻤﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ءﺎﺑﺮﻬﻜﻟﺍ ﻞﺒﻛ ﺔﻳﺎﻤﺤﺑ ﻢﻗ .10
.ﻂﻘﻓ ﻊﻨﺼﻤﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺔﻣﺪﻘﻤﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻘﺤﻠﻤﻟﺍ / ﺕﺎﻘﻓﺮﻤﻟﺍ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ .11
ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﺔﻋﻮﻤﺠﻣ / ﺔﺑﺮﻌﻟﺍ ﻚﻳﺮﺤﺗ ﺪﻨﻋ ﻙﺭﺬﺣ ﺬﺧ ،ﺔﺑﺮﻌﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﺪﻨﻋ .ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﻊﻣ ﻉﺎﺒﺗ ﻲﺘﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ،ﻊﻨﺼﻤﻟﺍ ﺎﻫﺩﺪﺣ ﻲﺘﻟﺍ ﺔﻟﻭﺎﻄﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ،ﺪﻨﺴﻤﻟﺍﻭ ،ﻞﻤﺤﻤﻟﺍﻭ ،ﺓﺪﻀﻨﻤﻟﺍﻭ ،ﻞﻣﺎﺤﻟﺍ ﻊﻣ ﻂﻘﻓ ﻪﻣﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ .12
.ﺏﻼﻘﻧﻻﺍ ﺪﻨﻋ ﻚﺘﺑﺎﺻﺇ ﺐﻨﺠﺘﻟ
.ﺔﻠﻳﻮﻃ ﺕﺍﺮﺘﻔﻟ ﻪﻣﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻡﺪﻋ ﺪﻨﻋ ﻭﺃ ﻕﺮﺒﻟﺍ ﻒﺻﺍﻮﻋ ءﺎﻨﺛﺃ
ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﺲﺑﺎﻗ ﻉﺰﻧﺍ .13
ﻰﻠﻋ ءﺎﻴﺷﺃ ﻭﺃ ﻞﺋﺎﺳ ﻁﻮﻘﺳ ﺪﻨﻋ ﻭﺃ ،ﺲﺑﺎﻘﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ءﺎﺑﺮﻬﻜﻟﺍ ﺩﻭﺰﻣ ﻞﺒﻛ ﻒﻠﺗ ﻞﺜﻣ ،ﺔﻘﻳﺮﻃ ﻱﺄﺑ ﻒﻠﺘﻠﻟ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﺽﺮﻌﺗ ﺪﻨﻋ ﺔﻧﺎﻴﺼﻟﺍ ءﺍﺮﺟﺇ ﺐﺠﻳ .ﻦﻴﻠﻫﺆﻤﻟﺍ ﻦﻴﻔﻇﻮﻤﻠﻟ ﺔﻧﺎﻴﺼﻟﺍ ﻝﺎﻤﻋﺃ ﻊﻴﻤﺟ ﻲﻓ ﻊﺟﺭﺍ .14
.ﺽﺭﻷﺍ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻪﻃﻮﻘﺳ ﺔﻟﺎﺣ ﻲﻓﻭﺃ ،ﺔﻴﻌﻴﺒﻃ ﺓﺭﻮﺼﺑ ﻞﻤﻌﻳ ﻢﻟ ﺍﺫﺇ ﻭﺃ ،ﺔﺑﻮﻃﺮﻠﻟ ﻭﺃ ﺮﻄﻤﻠﻟ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﺽﺮﻌﺗ ﺪﻨﻋ ﻭﺃ ،ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ
ﻉﻮﻨﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ءﺎﺑﺮﻬﻛ ﺩﻭﺰﻤﺑ ﻂﻘﻓ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﻞﺻﻭ .ﺎﻨﺑ ﺹﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﻲﻧﺎﺠﻤﻟﺍ "ﺔﻴﺿﺭﻷﺍ ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻬﻜﻟﺍ ﻑﺍﺮﻃﻷﺍﻭ ﻖﻋﺍﻮﺼﻟﺎﺑ ﺔﺑﺎﺻﻹﺍ ﺮﻄﺧ" ﺐﻴﺘﻛ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻝﻮﺼﺤﻠﻟ ﺎﻨﻠﺳﺍﺭ .ﻲﺿﺭﻷﺍ ﻞﺻﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﻊﻄﻘﺑ ﺍﺪﺑﺃ ﻢﻘﺗ .15
.ﺔﻗﺎﻄﻟﺍ ﺩﻭﺰﻣ ﻞﺒﻜﻟ ﺓﺭﻭﺎﺠﻤﻟﺍ ﺓﺪﺣﻮﻟﺍ ﻰﻠﻋ ﺩﺪﺤﻤﻟﺍ
.ﺕﺍﺪﻌﻣ ﻑﺭ ﻰﻠﻋ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﺐﻴﻛﺮﺗ ﺪﻨﻋ ﻲﻔﻠﺨﻟﺍ ﻢﻋﺪﻟﺍ ﺮﻴﻓﻮﺗ ﺐﺠﻳ .16
:ﻲﻠﻳ ﺎﻣ ﻊﺒﺗﺍ ،ﻚﺑ ﺹﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﺲﺒﻘﻤﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﻑﺍﺮﻃﻸﻟ ﺓﺩﺪﺤﻤﻟﺍ ﺔﻧﻮﻠﻤﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻼﻌﻟﺍ ﻊﻣ ﻖﻓﺍﻮﺘﺗ ﺓﺪﺣﻮﻟﺍ ﻩﺬﻬﻟ ﺔﻴﺴﻴﺋﺮﻟﺍ ﻑﺍﺮﻃﻷﺍ ﻲﻓ ﻙﻼﺳﻷﺍ ﻥﺍﻮﻟﺃ ﺖﻧﺎﻛ ﺍﺫﺇ :ﻂﻘﻓ ﺓﺪﺤﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﺔﻜﻠﻤﻤﻠﻟ ﺔﻈﺣﻼﻣ .17
.ﺮﻔﺻﻷﺍﻭ ﺮﻀﺧﻷﺍ ﻭﺃ ﺮﻀﺧﻷﺎﺑ ﻥﻮﻠﻤﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ﻲﺿﺭﻷﺍ ﺰﻣﺭ ﻭﺃ ،E ﻑﺮﺤﻟﺎﺑ ﺰﻴﻤﻤﻟﺍ ﻑﺮﻄﻟﺎﺑ ﺮﻔﺻﻷﺍﻭ ﺮﻀﺧﻷﺎﺑ ﻥﻮﻠﻤﻟﺍ ﻚﻠﺴﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﺻﻮﺗ ﺐﺠﻳ (
.ﺩﻮﺳﻷﺍ ﻥﻮﻠﻟﺍ ﻭﺫ ﻭﺃ ،N ﻑﺮﺤﻟﺎﺑ ﺰﻴﻤﻤﻟﺍ ﻑﺮﻄﻟﺎﺑ ﻕﺭﺯﻷﺍ ﻥﻮﻠﻟﺎﺑ ﻥﻮﻠﻤﻟﺍ ﻚﻠﺴﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﺻﻮﺗ ﺐﺠﻳ (
.ﺮﻤﺣﻷﺍ ﻥﻮﻠﻟﺍ ﻭﺫ ﻭﺃ ،L ﻑﺮﺤﻟﺎﺑ ﺰﻴﻤﻤﻟﺍ ﻑﺮﻄﻟﺎﺑ ﻲﻨﺒﻟﺎﺑ ﻥﻮﻠﻤﻟﺍ ﻚﻠﺴﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﺻﻮﺗ ﺐﺠﻳ (
.ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﻕﻮﻓ ،ﺕﺎﻳﺮﻫﺰﻟﺍ ﻞﺜﻣ ،ﻞﺋﺍﻮﺳ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻱﻮﺘﺤﺗ ﻲﺘﻟﺍ ءﺎﻴﺷﻷﺍ ﻊﺿﻭ ﻡﺪﻌﺑ ﻪﺑ ﺔﻳﺎﻨﻌﻟﺍ ﺐﺠﻳ ﺎﻤﻛ ،ﻞﺋﺍﻮﺴﻟﺍ ﺵﺭ ﻭﺃ ﻂﻴﻘﻨﺘﻟ ﻲﺑﺮﻬﻜﻟﺍ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ
ﺍﺬﻫ ﺾﻳﺮﻌﺗ ﺐﺠﻳ .18
.ﻑﺎﻘﻳﻹﺍ ﻊﺿﻭ ﻲﻓ ﻑﺎﻘﻳﻹﺍ/ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺘﻟﺍ ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ ﻥﻮﻜﻳ ﺎﻣﺪﻨﻋ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﻞﻜﻴﻫ ﻞﺧﺍﺩ ﺓﺮﻄﺧ ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻬﻛ ﺕﺎﻨﺤﺷ ﺪﺟﻮﺗ ﺪﻗ .ﺔﻴﻟﻭﻷﺍ ﺔﻴﺴﻴﺋﺮﻟﺍ ﻑﺍﺮﻃﻷﺍ ﻲﺒﻧﺎﺟ ﺓﺪﺣﻮﻟﺍ ﻩﺬﻬﺑ ﻑﺎﻘﻳﻹﺍ/ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺘﻟﺍ ﺡﺎﺘﻔﻣ ﻞﻄﻌﻳ .19
.ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺘﻠﻟ ﻞﺑﺎﻗ ﻞﻈﻳ ﻥﺃ ﺐﺠﻳ ﻱﺬﻟﺍ ،ﻝﺎﺼﺗﻻﺍ ﻊﻄﻗ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻛ ﺯﺎﻬﺠﻟﺍ ﺔﻠﺻﻭ ﻭﺃ ﺔﻴﺴﻴﺋﺮﻟﺍ ﻑﺍﺮﻃﻷﺍ ﺲﺑﺎﻗ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻢﺘﻳ
ﺺﺨﺸﻟﺍ ﺪﻘﻔﻳ ﺪﻗ ﺎﺒﻳﺮﻘﺗ ﻦﻜﻟ ،ﺪﻴﻌﺑ ﺪﺤﻟ ﻊﻤﺴﻟﺍ ﻥﺍﺪﻘﻔﻟ ﻱﺩﺆﺗ ﻲﺘﻟﺍ ءﺎﺿﻮﻀﻠﻟ ﻢﻬﺘﻴﺳﺎﺴﺣ ﻱﺪﻣ ﻲﻓ ﺹﺎﺨﺷﻷﺍ ﻒﻠﺘﺨﻳ .ﻢﺋﺍﺩ ﻊﻤﺳ ﻥﺍﺪﻘﻓ ﻰﻟﺇ ﺍﺪﺟ ﺔﻴﻟﺎﻋ ءﺎﺿﻮﺿ ﺕﺎﻳﻮﺘﺴﻤﻟ ﺽﺮﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﺐﺒﺴﻳ ﺪﻗ .20
:ءﺎﺿﻮﻀﻠﻟ ﻪﺑ ﺡﻮﻤﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﺽﺮﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﻱﻮﺘﺴﻣ ﺔﻴﻜﻳﺮﻣﻷﺍ ﺔﻣﻮﻜﺤﻟﺎﺑ ﻲﻨﻬﻤﻟﺍ ﻥﺎﻣﻷﺍﻭ ﺔﺤﺼﻟﺍ ﺓﺭﺍﺩﺇ ﺕﺩﺪﺣ ﺪﻗﻭ .ﻲﻓﺎﻛ ﺖﻗﻮﻟ ﻚﻟﺫﻭ ﺓﺪﻳﺪﺸﻟﺍ ءﺎﺿﻮﻀﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﻲﻓﺎﻛ ﺭﺪﻘﻟ ﺽﺮﻌﺗ ﺍﺫﺇ ﻪﻌﻤﺳ ﻦﻣ ﺾﻌﺑ
:ﻲﻟﺎﺘﻟﺍ ﻞﻤﺸﺗ ﻲﺘﻟﺍﻭ ،ﺎﻤﺋﺍﺩ ﺔﻴﺳﺎﺳﻷﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﻉﺎﺒﺗﺍ ﺐﺠﻳ ،ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻬﻜﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﺠﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﺪﻨﻋ :ﺮﻳﺬﺤﺗ
ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺗ ﺪﻨﻋ ﻥﺫﻷﺍ ﻕﻮﻓ ﻭﺃ ﻥﺫﻷﺍ ﺕﺍﻮﻨﻗ ﺕﺎﻴﻗﺍﻭ ﻭﺃ ﻥﺫﻷﺍ ﺕﺍﺩﺍﺪﺳ ءﺍﺪﺗﺭﺍ ﺐﺠﻳ .ﻊﻤﺴﻠﻟ ﻲﺋﺰﺟ ﻥﺍﺪﻘﻓ ﻰﻟﺇ ﻱﺩﺆﻳ ﻥﺃ ﻦﻜﻤﻳ ﺎﻬﺑ ﺡﻮﻤﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﺩﻭﺪﺤﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﻰﻠﻋﺃ ﺽﺮﻌﺗ ﻱﺃ ﻥﺈﻓ ،ﻲﻨﻬﻤﻟﺍ ﻥﺎﻣﻷﺍﻭ ﺔﺤﺼﻟﺍ ﺓﺭﺍﺩﻹ ﺎﻘﻓﻭ
،ﺔﻴﻟﺎﻋ ﻲﺗﻮﺻ ﻂﻐﺿ ﺕﺎﻳﻮﺘﺴﻤﻟ ﻞﻤﺘﺤﻤﻟﺍ ﺮﻄﺨﻟﺍ ﺽﺮﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﻥﺎﻤﻀﻠﻟ .ﻩﻼﻋﺃ ﺔﻌﺑﺍﺮﻟﺍ ﺔﻄﻘﻨﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﺎﻬﺿﺮﻋ ﻢﺗ ﻲﺘﻟﺍ ﺩﻭﺪﺤﻟﺍ ﻰﻠﻋ ﺪﻳﺰﻳ ﺽﺮﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﻥﺎﻛ ﺍﺫﺇ ،ﻢﺋﺍﺪﻟﺍ ﻊﻤﺴﻟﺍ ﻥﺍﺪﻘﻓ ﻊﻨﻤﻟ ﻚﻟﺫﻭ ﺕﻮﺼﻟﺍ ﺮﻴﺒﻜﺗ ﺔﻤﻈﻧﺃ
.ﻞﻴﻐﺸﺘﻟﺍ ءﺎﻨﺛﺃ ﻢﻬﺘﻳﺎﻤﺤﻟ ﻥﺫﻷﺍ ﺕﺎﻴﻗﺍﻭ ﺍﻮﻣﺪﺨﺘﺴﻳ ﻥﺃ ﺕﻮﺼﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺮﺒﻜﻣ ﺔﻤﻈﻧﺃ ﻞﺜﻣ ﺔﻴﻟﺎﻋ ﻲﺗﻮﺻ ﻂﻐﺿ ﺕﺎﻳﻮﺘﺴﻣ ﺭﺍﺪﺻﺇ ﻰﻠﻋ ﺓﺭﺩﺎﻗ ﺕﺍﺪﻌﻤﻟ
ﻦﻴﺿﺮﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺹﺎﺨﺷﻷﺍ ﻊﻴﻤﺟ ﺢﺼﻨﻳ
ﺕﺎﻋﺎﺴﻟﺎﺑ ﺎﻴﻣﻮﻳ ﺓﺪﻤﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﺠﻳﺭﺪﺘﻟ ﺔﺑﺎﺠﺘﺳﻻﺍ ،ﻞﺒﻴﺴﻳﺪﻟﺎﺑ ﺕﻮﺼﻟﺍ ﻱﻮﺘﺴﻣ
8 90
6 92
4 95
3 97
2 100
21 1 102
1 105
21 110
ﻞﻗﺃ ﻭﺃ 41 115
!ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟ ﻩﺬﻫ ﻆﻔﺣﺍ
Correct Disposal of this product. This marking indicates that this
product should not be disposed with other house hold wastes
throughout the EU. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, recycle it responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. To return your
used device, please use the return and collection systems, or contact
the retailer where the product was purchased. They can take this
product for environmental safe recycling.
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex
I(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and dened in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and is applied
only to equipment manufactured after 13 August 2005
Forma correcta de deshacerse de este producto. Esta marca indica que este producto
no debe arrojarse junto con otros desperdicios domésticos en ningún lugar de la Unión
Europea. Para evitar posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana debidos a
desechos no controlados de desperdicios, recíclelo responsablemente para promover
la reutilización sostenible de los recursos materiales. Para devolver su dispositivo
usado, utilice los sistemas de devolución recolección, o contacte con el vendedor
minorista donde compró el producto. Ellos pueden llevar este producto al reciclado
seguro para el medio ambiente.
Logotipo al que se hace referencia en la Directiva 2002/96/EC
AnexoIV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 y denido en EN 50419: 2005
La barra es el símbolo para marcar los nuevos desechos y se aplica
solamente a equipamiento fabricado después del 13 de agosto de 2005
Recyclez correctement ce produit. Cette signalisation indique que ce produit ne
doit pas être jeté avec les autres déchets domestiques dans les pays de l’UE. Pour
éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé humaine par des décharges
sauvages, recyclez ce produit de manière responsable pour encourager la
réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Pour retourner votre appareil usé,
veuillez utiliser les systèmes de collecte et de retour, ou contactez le revendeur
à qui vous avez acheté le produit. Il prendra en charge ce produit de manière à
protéger l’environnement.
Logo documenté dans l’annexe de la Directive 2002/96/EC
IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 et déni par la norme EN 50419:2005
La barre est le symbole de signalisation des nouveaux déchets qui
s’applique uniquement aux équipements fabriqués après le 13 août 2005
Tuotteen oikea hävittäminen. Tämä merkki ilmaisee, että tuotetta ei saa hävittää muun
talousjätteen mukana EU:n alueella. Jotta estetään mahdolliset valvomattoman jätteiden
hävittämisen haitat ympäristölle tai ihmisten terveydelle, kierrätä tuote vastuullisesti ja
edistä materiaalien kestävää uudelleenkäyttöä. Voit palauttaa käytetyn laitteen käyttämällä
keräysjärjestelmiä tai ottamalla yhteyttä jälleenmyyjään, jolta laite ostettiin. He voivat
toimittaa tuotteen ympäristön kannalta turvalliseen kierrätykseen.
Logo viitattu direktiivin 2002/96/EY liitteen
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 mukaisesti, määritelty standardissa EN 50419: 2005
Palkki on uuden jätteen merkintäsymboli ja sitä käytetään vain 13. elokuuta
2005 jälkeen valmistetuissa laitteissa
Juiste verwijdering van dit product. Deze markering geeft aan dat dit product
nergens in de Europese Unie met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden afgevoerd.
Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of gezondheid door ongecontroleerde
afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, recycle het op een verantwoorde wijze om het
duurzame hergebruik van materiaalgrondstoffen te bevorderen. Om uw gebruikte
apparaat in te leveren, kunt u gebruik maken van de inlever- en verzamelsystemen
of contact opnemen met de verkoper waar het product is gekocht. Zij kunnen dit
product innemen voor het milieuvriendelijk recycling.
Het logo waarnaar wordt verwezen in de bijlage van Richtlijn 2002/96/EG
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 en omschreven in EN 50419: 2005
De balk is het symbool voor het markeren van nieuw afval en wordt
alleen toegepast op apparatuur dat is vervaardigd na 13 augustus 2005
正确处理此产品。此标志表明该产品在整个欧盟区内不应该与其他家居生
活废弃物一同处置。为防止因无控废弃物处置对环境或人类健康可能造成
的危害,请负责地回收并促进可重复使用的物质资源。要返还旧设备,请
使用退返收集系统,或联系购买此产品的零售商。他们会为环境安全回收
此产品。
标志参照 2002/96/EC 指令附录
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 EN 50419: 2005 定义
条码符号标示新废弃物,仅适用 2005 8 13 日后生产的设备
Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt umweltgerecht. Diese Kennzeichnung bedeutet,
dass das Produkt innerhalb der EU nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Zur Vermeidung von Umwelt- und Gesundheitsschäden durch unkontrollierte
Entsorgung recyceln Sie das Gerät bitte. Geben Sie das Gerät an einer Sammelstelle
für Elektroaltgeräte ab oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler.
Logo eingetragen in Richtlinie 2002/96/EC AnhangI
IV_(OJ(L)37/38, 13.02.03 und deniert in EN 50419: 2005
Der Balken ist das Symbol zur Kennzeichnung neuen Abfalls und wird nur
auf Geräten angebracht, die nach dem 13. August 2005 gefertigt wurden
Korrekt bortskaffande av denna produkt. Denna märkning betyder att
produkten inte skall bortskaffas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall i
hela EU. För att förhindra eventuella skador för miljön eller människors
hälsa från okontrollerat bortskaffande av avfall, återvinn det ansvarsfullt för
att främja hållbar återanvändning av materiella resurser. För att returnera
din använda enhet, använd återanvändnings- och uppsamlingssystem,
eller kontakta den återförsäljare där produkten köptes. De kan ta hand om
denna produkt för miljösäker återvinning.
Logotyp som hänvisas till i direktiv 2002/96/EG bilaga
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 och denieras i EN 50419: 2005
Stapeln är symbolen för märkning av nytt avfall och är endast
tillämplig på utrustning som tillverkats efter 13 augusti, 2005
Corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto. Questo simbolo indica che questo prodotto
non deve essere smaltito insieme ad altri riuti domestici in tutta Europa. Per
prevenire possibili danni all’ambiente o alla salute umana dovuti allo smaltimento non
regolamentato dei riuti, è necessario riciclarlo responsabilmente al ne di promuovere
il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Per restituire il dispositivo usato, utilizzare
i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta o contattare il rivenditore presso il quale il prodotto è
stato acquistato. Quest’ultimo può occuparsi del riciclaggio ambientale sicuro di questo
prodotto.
Simbolo presente nell’allegato IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 della direttiva 2002/96/
CE e denito nello standard EN 50419: 2005
La barra è il simbolo indicante un nuovo riuto ed è applicata esclusivamente ad
apparecchiature prodotte successivamente al 13 agosto 2005
Correct Disposal of this product. This marking indicates that this
product should not be disposed with other house hold wastes
throughout the EU. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, recycle it responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. To return your
used device, please use the return and collection systems, or contact
the retailer where the product was purchased. They can take this
product for environmental safe recycling.
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex
I(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and dened in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and is applied
only to equipment manufactured after 13 August 2005
Forma correcta de deshacerse de este producto. Esta marca indica que este producto
no debe arrojarse junto con otros desperdicios domésticos en ningún lugar de la Unión
Europea. Para evitar posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana debidos a
desechos no controlados de desperdicios, recíclelo responsablemente para promover
la reutilización sostenible de los recursos materiales. Para devolver su dispositivo
usado, utilice los sistemas de devolución recolección, o contacte con el vendedor
minorista donde compró el producto. Ellos pueden llevar este producto al reciclado
seguro para el medio ambiente.
Logotipo al que se hace referencia en la Directiva 2002/96/EC
AnexoIV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 y denido en EN 50419: 2005
La barra es el símbolo para marcar los nuevos desechos y se aplica
solamente a equipamiento fabricado después del 13 de agosto de 2005
Recyclez correctement ce produit. Cette signalisation indique que ce produit ne
doit pas être jeté avec les autres déchets domestiques dans les pays de l’UE. Pour
éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé humaine par des décharges
sauvages, recyclez ce produit de manière responsable pour encourager la
réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Pour retourner votre appareil usé,
veuillez utiliser les systèmes de collecte et de retour, ou contactez le revendeur
à qui vous avez acheté le produit. Il prendra en charge ce produit de manière à
protéger l’environnement.
Logo documenté dans l’annexe de la Directive 2002/96/EC
IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 et déni par la norme EN 50419:2005
La barre est le symbole de signalisation des nouveaux déchets qui
s’applique uniquement aux équipements fabriqués après le 13 août 2005
Juiste verwijdering van dit product. Deze markering geeft aan dat dit product
nergens in de Europese Unie met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden afgevoerd.
Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of gezondheid door ongecontroleerde
afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, recycle het op een verantwoorde wijze om het
duurzame hergebruik van materiaalgrondstoffen te bevorderen. Om uw gebruikte
apparaat in te leveren, kunt u gebruik maken van de inlever- en verzamelsystemen
of contact opnemen met de verkoper waar het product is gekocht. Zij kunnen dit
product innemen voor het milieuvriendelijk recycling.
Het logo waarnaar wordt verwezen in de bijlage van Richtlijn 2002/96/EG
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 en omschreven in EN 50419: 2005
De balk is het symbool voor het markeren van nieuw afval en wordt
alleen toegepast op apparatuur dat is vervaardigd na 13 augustus 2005
正确处理此产品。此标志表明该产品在整个欧盟区内不应该与其他家居生
活废弃物一同处置。为防止因无控废弃物处置对环境或人类健康可能造成
的危害,请负责地回收并促进可重复使用的物质资源。要返还旧设备,请
使用退返收集系统,或联系购买此产品的零售商。他们会为环境安全回收
此产品。
标志参照 2002/96/EC 指令附录
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 EN 50419: 2005 定义
条码符号标示新废弃物,仅适用 2005 8 13 日后生产的设备
Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt umweltgerecht. Diese Kennzeichnung bedeutet,
dass das Produkt innerhalb der EU nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Zur Vermeidung von Umwelt- und Gesundheitsschäden durch unkontrollierte
Entsorgung recyceln Sie das Gerät bitte. Geben Sie das Gerät an einer Sammelstelle
für Elektroaltgeräte ab oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler.
Logo eingetragen in Richtlinie 2002/96/EC AnhangI
IV_(OJ(L)37/38, 13.02.03 und deniert in EN 50419: 2005
Der Balken ist das Symbol zur Kennzeichnung neuen Abfalls und wird nur
auf Geräten angebracht, die nach dem 13. August 2005 gefertigt wurden
Korrekt bortskaffande av denna produkt. Denna märkning betyder att
produkten inte skall bortskaffas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall i
hela EU. För att förhindra eventuella skador för miljön eller människors
hälsa från okontrollerat bortskaffande av avfall, återvinn det ansvarsfullt för
att främja hållbar återanvändning av materiella resurser. För att returnera
din använda enhet, använd återanvändnings- och uppsamlingssystem,
eller kontakta den återförsäljare där produkten köptes. De kan ta hand om
denna produkt för miljösäker återvinning.
Logotyp som hänvisas till i direktiv 2002/96/EG bilaga
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 och denieras i EN 50419: 2005
Stapeln är symbolen för märkning av nytt avfall och är endast
tillämplig på utrustning som tillverkats efter 13 augusti, 2005
Corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto. Questo simbolo indica che questo prodotto
non deve essere smaltito insieme ad altri riuti domestici in tutta Europa. Per
prevenire possibili danni all’ambiente o alla salute umana dovuti allo smaltimento non
regolamentato dei riuti, è necessario riciclarlo responsabilmente al ne di promuovere
il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Per restituire il dispositivo usato, utilizzare
i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta o contattare il rivenditore presso il quale il prodotto è
stato acquistato. Quest’ultimo può occuparsi del riciclaggio ambientale sicuro di questo
prodotto.
Simbolo presente nell’allegato IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 della direttiva 2002/96/
CE e denito nello standard EN 50419: 2005
La barra è il simbolo indicante un nuovo riuto ed è applicata esclusivamente ad
apparecchiature prodotte successivamente al 13 agosto 2005
Correct Disposal of this product. This marking indicates that this
product should not be disposed with other house hold wastes
throughout the EU. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, recycle it responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. To return your
used device, please use the return and collection systems, or contact
the retailer where the product was purchased. They can take this
product for environmental safe recycling.
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex
I(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and dened in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and is applied
only to equipment manufactured after 13 August 2005
Forma correcta de deshacerse de este producto. Esta marca indica que este producto
no debe arrojarse junto con otros desperdicios domésticos en ningún lugar de la Unión
Europea. Para evitar posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana debidos a
desechos no controlados de desperdicios, recíclelo responsablemente para promover
la reutilización sostenible de los recursos materiales. Para devolver su dispositivo
usado, utilice los sistemas de devolución recolección, o contacte con el vendedor
minorista donde compró el producto. Ellos pueden llevar este producto al reciclado
seguro para el medio ambiente.
Logotipo al que se hace referencia en la Directiva 2002/96/EC
AnexoIV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 y denido en EN 50419: 2005
La barra es el símbolo para marcar los nuevos desechos y se aplica
solamente a equipamiento fabricado después del 13 de agosto de 2005
Recyclez correctement ce produit. Cette signalisation indique que ce produit ne
doit pas être jeté avec les autres déchets domestiques dans les pays de l’UE. Pour
éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé humaine par des décharges
sauvages, recyclez ce produit de manière responsable pour encourager la
réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Pour retourner votre appareil usé,
veuillez utiliser les systèmes de collecte et de retour, ou contactez le revendeur
à qui vous avez acheté le produit. Il prendra en charge ce produit de manière à
protéger l’environnement.
Logo documenté dans l’annexe de la Directive 2002/96/EC
IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 et déni par la norme EN 50419:2005
La barre est le symbole de signalisation des nouveaux déchets qui
s’applique uniquement aux équipements fabriqués après le 13 août 2005
Tuotteen oikea hävittäminen. Tämä merkki ilmaisee, että tuotetta ei saa hävittää muun
talousjätteen mukana EU:n alueella. Jotta estetään mahdolliset valvomattoman jätteiden
hävittämisen haitat ympäristölle tai ihmisten terveydelle, kierrätä tuote vastuullisesti ja
edistä materiaalien kestävää uudelleenkäyttöä. Voit palauttaa käytetyn laitteen käyttämällä
keräysjärjestelmiä tai ottamalla yhteyttä jälleenmyyjään, jolta laite ostettiin. He voivat
toimittaa tuotteen ympäristön kannalta turvalliseen kierrätykseen.
Logo viitattu direktiivin 2002/96/EY liitteen
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 mukaisesti, määritelty standardissa EN 50419: 2005
Palkki on uuden jätteen merkintäsymboli ja sitä käytetään vain 13. elokuuta
2005 jälkeen valmistetuissa laitteissa
Juiste verwijdering van dit product. Deze markering geeft aan dat dit product
nergens in de Europese Unie met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden afgevoerd.
Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of gezondheid door ongecontroleerde
afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, recycle het op een verantwoorde wijze om het
duurzame hergebruik van materiaalgrondstoffen te bevorderen. Om uw gebruikte
apparaat in te leveren, kunt u gebruik maken van de inlever- en verzamelsystemen
of contact opnemen met de verkoper waar het product is gekocht. Zij kunnen dit
product innemen voor het milieuvriendelijk recycling.
Het logo waarnaar wordt verwezen in de bijlage van Richtlijn 2002/96/EG
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 en omschreven in EN 50419: 2005
De balk is het symbool voor het markeren van nieuw afval en wordt
alleen toegepast op apparatuur dat is vervaardigd na 13 augustus 2005
正确处理此产品。此标志表明该产品在整个欧盟区内不应该与其他家居生
活废弃物一同处置。为防止因无控废弃物处置对环境或人类健康可能造成
的危害,请负责地回收并促进可重复使用的物质资源。要返还旧设备,请
使用退返收集系统,或联系购买此产品的零售商。他们会为环境安全回收
此产品。
标志参照 2002/96/EC 指令附录
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 EN 50419: 2005 定义
条码符号标示新废弃物,仅适用 2005 8 13 日后生产的设备
Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt umweltgerecht. Diese Kennzeichnung bedeutet,
dass das Produkt innerhalb der EU nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Zur Vermeidung von Umwelt- und Gesundheitsschäden durch unkontrollierte
Entsorgung recyceln Sie das Gerät bitte. Geben Sie das Gerät an einer Sammelstelle
für Elektroaltgeräte ab oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler.
Logo eingetragen in Richtlinie 2002/96/EC AnhangI
IV_(OJ(L)37/38, 13.02.03 und deniert in EN 50419: 2005
Der Balken ist das Symbol zur Kennzeichnung neuen Abfalls und wird nur
auf Geräten angebracht, die nach dem 13. August 2005 gefertigt wurden
Korrekt bortskaffande av denna produkt. Denna märkning betyder att
produkten inte skall bortskaffas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall i
hela EU. För att förhindra eventuella skador för miljön eller människors
hälsa från okontrollerat bortskaffande av avfall, återvinn det ansvarsfullt för
att främja hållbar återanvändning av materiella resurser. För att returnera
din använda enhet, använd återanvändnings- och uppsamlingssystem,
eller kontakta den återförsäljare där produkten köptes. De kan ta hand om
denna produkt för miljösäker återvinning.
Logotyp som hänvisas till i direktiv 2002/96/EG bilaga
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 och denieras i EN 50419: 2005
Stapeln är symbolen för märkning av nytt avfall och är endast
tillämplig på utrustning som tillverkats efter 13 augusti, 2005
Corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto. Questo simbolo indica che questo prodotto
non deve essere smaltito insieme ad altri riuti domestici in tutta Europa. Per
prevenire possibili danni all’ambiente o alla salute umana dovuti allo smaltimento non
regolamentato dei riuti, è necessario riciclarlo responsabilmente al ne di promuovere
il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Per restituire il dispositivo usato, utilizzare
i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta o contattare il rivenditore presso il quale il prodotto è
stato acquistato. Quest’ultimo può occuparsi del riciclaggio ambientale sicuro di questo
prodotto.
Simbolo presente nell’allegato IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 della direttiva 2002/96/
CE e denito nello standard EN 50419: 2005
La barra è il simbolo indicante un nuovo riuto ed è applicata esclusivamente ad
apparecchiature prodotte successivamente al 13 agosto 2005
Correct Disposal of this product. This marking indicates that this
product should not be disposed with other house hold wastes
throughout the EU. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, recycle it responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. To return your
used device, please use the return and collection systems, or contact
the retailer where the product was purchased. They can take this
product for environmental safe recycling.
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex
I(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and dened in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and is applied
only to equipment manufactured after 13 August 2005
Forma correcta de deshacerse de este producto. Esta marca indica que este producto
no debe arrojarse junto con otros desperdicios domésticos en ningún lugar de la Unión
Europea. Para evitar posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana debidos a
desechos no controlados de desperdicios, recíclelo responsablemente para promover
la reutilización sostenible de los recursos materiales. Para devolver su dispositivo
usado, utilice los sistemas de devolución recolección, o contacte con el vendedor
minorista donde compró el producto. Ellos pueden llevar este producto al reciclado
seguro para el medio ambiente.
Logotipo al que se hace referencia en la Directiva 2002/96/EC
AnexoIV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 y denido en EN 50419: 2005
La barra es el símbolo para marcar los nuevos desechos y se aplica
solamente a equipamiento fabricado después del 13 de agosto de 2005
Recyclez correctement ce produit. Cette signalisation indique que ce produit ne
doit pas être jeté avec les autres déchets domestiques dans les pays de l’UE. Pour
éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé humaine par des décharges
sauvages, recyclez ce produit de manière responsable pour encourager la
réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Pour retourner votre appareil usé,
veuillez utiliser les systèmes de collecte et de retour, ou contactez le revendeur
à qui vous avez acheté le produit. Il prendra en charge ce produit de manière à
protéger l’environnement.
Logo documenté dans l’annexe de la Directive 2002/96/EC
IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 et déni par la norme EN 50419:2005
La barre est le symbole de signalisation des nouveaux déchets qui
s’applique uniquement aux équipements fabriqués après le 13 août 2005
Tuotteen oikea hävittäminen. Tämä merkki ilmaisee, että tuotetta ei saa hävittää muun
talousjätteen mukana EU:n alueella. Jotta estetään mahdolliset valvomattoman jätteiden
hävittämisen haitat ympäristölle tai ihmisten terveydelle, kierrätä tuote vastuullisesti ja
edistä materiaalien kestävää uudelleenkäyttöä. Voit palauttaa käytetyn laitteen käyttämällä
keräysjärjestelmiä tai ottamalla yhteyttä jälleenmyyjään, jolta laite ostettiin. He voivat
toimittaa tuotteen ympäristön kannalta turvalliseen kierrätykseen.
Logo viitattu direktiivin 2002/96/EY liitteen
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 mukaisesti, määritelty standardissa EN 50419: 2005
Palkki on uuden jätteen merkintäsymboli ja sitä käytetään vain 13. elokuuta
2005 jälkeen valmistetuissa laitteissa
Juiste verwijdering van dit product. Deze markering geeft aan dat dit product
nergens in de Europese Unie met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden afgevoerd.
Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of gezondheid door ongecontroleerde
afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, recycle het op een verantwoorde wijze om het
duurzame hergebruik van materiaalgrondstoffen te bevorderen. Om uw gebruikte
apparaat in te leveren, kunt u gebruik maken van de inlever- en verzamelsystemen
of contact opnemen met de verkoper waar het product is gekocht. Zij kunnen dit
product innemen voor het milieuvriendelijk recycling.
Het logo waarnaar wordt verwezen in de bijlage van Richtlijn 2002/96/EG
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 en omschreven in EN 50419: 2005
De balk is het symbool voor het markeren van nieuw afval en wordt
alleen toegepast op apparatuur dat is vervaardigd na 13 augustus 2005
正确处理此产品。此标志表明该产品在整个欧盟区内不应该与其他家居生
活废弃物一同处置。为防止因无控废弃物处置对环境或人类健康可能造成
的危害,请负责地回收并促进可重复使用的物质资源。要返还旧设备,请
使用退返收集系统,或联系购买此产品的零售商。他们会为环境安全回收
此产品。
标志参照 2002/96/EC 指令附录
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 EN 50419: 2005 定义
条码符号标示新废弃物,仅适用 2005 8 13 日后生产的设备
Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt umweltgerecht. Diese Kennzeichnung bedeutet,
dass das Produkt innerhalb der EU nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Zur Vermeidung von Umwelt- und Gesundheitsschäden durch unkontrollierte
Entsorgung recyceln Sie das Gerät bitte. Geben Sie das Gerät an einer Sammelstelle
für Elektroaltgeräte ab oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler.
Logo eingetragen in Richtlinie 2002/96/EC AnhangI
IV_(OJ(L)37/38, 13.02.03 und deniert in EN 50419: 2005
Der Balken ist das Symbol zur Kennzeichnung neuen Abfalls und wird nur
auf Geräten angebracht, die nach dem 13. August 2005 gefertigt wurden
Korrekt bortskaffande av denna produkt. Denna märkning betyder att
produkten inte skall bortskaffas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall i
hela EU. För att förhindra eventuella skador för miljön eller människors
hälsa från okontrollerat bortskaffande av avfall, återvinn det ansvarsfullt för
att främja hållbar återanvändning av materiella resurser. För att returnera
din använda enhet, använd återanvändnings- och uppsamlingssystem,
eller kontakta den återförsäljare där produkten köptes. De kan ta hand om
denna produkt för miljösäker återvinning.
Logotyp som hänvisas till i direktiv 2002/96/EG bilaga
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 och denieras i EN 50419: 2005
Stapeln är symbolen för märkning av nytt avfall och är endast
tillämplig på utrustning som tillverkats efter 13 augusti, 2005
Corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto. Questo simbolo indica che questo prodotto
non deve essere smaltito insieme ad altri riuti domestici in tutta Europa. Per
prevenire possibili danni all’ambiente o alla salute umana dovuti allo smaltimento non
regolamentato dei riuti, è necessario riciclarlo responsabilmente al ne di promuovere
il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Per restituire il dispositivo usato, utilizzare
i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta o contattare il rivenditore presso il quale il prodotto è
stato acquistato. Quest’ultimo può occuparsi del riciclaggio ambientale sicuro di questo
prodotto.
Simbolo presente nell’allegato IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 della direttiva 2002/96/
CE e denito nello standard EN 50419: 2005
La barra è il simbolo indicante un nuovo riuto ed è applicata esclusivamente ad
apparecchiature prodotte successivamente al 13 agosto 2005
Correct Disposal of this product. This marking indicates that this
product should not be disposed with other house hold wastes
throughout the EU. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, recycle it responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. To return your
used device, please use the return and collection systems, or contact
the retailer where the product was purchased. They can take this
product for environmental safe recycling.
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex
I(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and dened in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and is applied
only to equipment manufactured after 13 August 2005
Forma correcta de deshacerse de este producto. Esta marca indica que este producto
no debe arrojarse junto con otros desperdicios domésticos en ningún lugar de la Unión
Europea. Para evitar posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana debidos a
desechos no controlados de desperdicios, recíclelo responsablemente para promover
la reutilización sostenible de los recursos materiales. Para devolver su dispositivo
usado, utilice los sistemas de devolución recolección, o contacte con el vendedor
minorista donde compró el producto. Ellos pueden llevar este producto al reciclado
seguro para el medio ambiente.
Logotipo al que se hace referencia en la Directiva 2002/96/EC
AnexoIV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 y denido en EN 50419: 2005
La barra es el símbolo para marcar los nuevos desechos y se aplica
solamente a equipamiento fabricado después del 13 de agosto de 2005
Recyclez correctement ce produit. Cette signalisation indique que ce produit ne
doit pas être jeté avec les autres déchets domestiques dans les pays de l’UE. Pour
éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé humaine par des décharges
sauvages, recyclez ce produit de manière responsable pour encourager la
réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Pour retourner votre appareil usé,
veuillez utiliser les systèmes de collecte et de retour, ou contactez le revendeur
à qui vous avez acheté le produit. Il prendra en charge ce produit de manière à
protéger l’environnement.
Logo documenté dans l’annexe de la Directive 2002/96/EC
IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 et déni par la norme EN 50419:2005
La barre est le symbole de signalisation des nouveaux déchets qui
s’applique uniquement aux équipements fabriqués après le 13 août 2005
Tuotteen oikea hävittäminen. Tämä merkki ilmaisee, että tuotetta ei saa hävittää muun
talousjätteen mukana EU:n alueella. Jotta estetään mahdolliset valvomattoman jätteiden
hävittämisen haitat ympäristölle tai ihmisten terveydelle, kierrätä tuote vastuullisesti ja
edistä materiaalien kestävää uudelleenkäyttöä. Voit palauttaa käytetyn laitteen käyttämällä
keräysjärjestelmiä tai ottamalla yhteyttä jälleenmyyjään, jolta laite ostettiin. He voivat
toimittaa tuotteen ympäristön kannalta turvalliseen kierrätykseen.
Logo viitattu direktiivin 2002/96/EY liitteen
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 mukaisesti, määritelty standardissa EN 50419: 2005
Palkki on uuden jätteen merkintäsymboli ja sitä käytetään vain 13. elokuuta
2005 jälkeen valmistetuissa laitteissa
Juiste verwijdering van dit product. Deze markering geeft aan dat dit product
nergens in de Europese Unie met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden afgevoerd.
Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of gezondheid door ongecontroleerde
afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, recycle het op een verantwoorde wijze om het
duurzame hergebruik van materiaalgrondstoffen te bevorderen. Om uw gebruikte
apparaat in te leveren, kunt u gebruik maken van de inlever- en verzamelsystemen
of contact opnemen met de verkoper waar het product is gekocht. Zij kunnen dit
product innemen voor het milieuvriendelijk recycling.
Het logo waarnaar wordt verwezen in de bijlage van Richtlijn 2002/96/EG
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 en omschreven in EN 50419: 2005
De balk is het symbool voor het markeren van nieuw afval en wordt
alleen toegepast op apparatuur dat is vervaardigd na 13 augustus 2005
正确处理此产品。此标志表明该产品在整个欧盟区内不应该与其他家居生
活废弃物一同处置。为防止因无控废弃物处置对环境或人类健康可能造成
的危害,请负责地回收并促进可重复使用的物质资源。要返还旧设备,请
使用退返收集系统,或联系购买此产品的零售商。他们会为环境安全回收
此产品。
标志参照 2002/96/EC 指令附录
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 EN 50419: 2005 定义
条码符号标示新废弃物,仅适用 2005 8 13 日后生产的设备
Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt umweltgerecht. Diese Kennzeichnung bedeutet,
dass das Produkt innerhalb der EU nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Zur Vermeidung von Umwelt- und Gesundheitsschäden durch unkontrollierte
Entsorgung recyceln Sie das Gerät bitte. Geben Sie das Gerät an einer Sammelstelle
für Elektroaltgeräte ab oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler.
Logo eingetragen in Richtlinie 2002/96/EC AnhangI
IV_(OJ(L)37/38, 13.02.03 und deniert in EN 50419: 2005
Der Balken ist das Symbol zur Kennzeichnung neuen Abfalls und wird nur
auf Geräten angebracht, die nach dem 13. August 2005 gefertigt wurden
Korrekt bortskaffande av denna produkt. Denna märkning betyder att
produkten inte skall bortskaffas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall i
hela EU. För att förhindra eventuella skador för miljön eller människors
hälsa från okontrollerat bortskaffande av avfall, återvinn det ansvarsfullt för
att främja hållbar återanvändning av materiella resurser. För att returnera
din använda enhet, använd återanvändnings- och uppsamlingssystem,
eller kontakta den återförsäljare där produkten köptes. De kan ta hand om
denna produkt för miljösäker återvinning.
Logotyp som hänvisas till i direktiv 2002/96/EG bilaga
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 och denieras i EN 50419: 2005
Stapeln är symbolen för märkning av nytt avfall och är endast
tillämplig på utrustning som tillverkats efter 13 augusti, 2005
Corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto. Questo simbolo indica che questo prodotto
non deve essere smaltito insieme ad altri riuti domestici in tutta Europa. Per
prevenire possibili danni all’ambiente o alla salute umana dovuti allo smaltimento non
regolamentato dei riuti, è necessario riciclarlo responsabilmente al ne di promuovere
il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Per restituire il dispositivo usato, utilizzare
i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta o contattare il rivenditore presso il quale il prodotto è
stato acquistato. Quest’ultimo può occuparsi del riciclaggio ambientale sicuro di questo
prodotto.
Simbolo presente nell’allegato IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 della direttiva 2002/96/
CE e denito nello standard EN 50419: 2005
La barra è il simbolo indicante un nuovo riuto ed è applicata esclusivamente ad
apparecchiature prodotte successivamente al 13 agosto 2005
Correct Disposal of this product. This marking indicates that this
product should not be disposed with other house hold wastes
throughout the EU. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, recycle it responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. To return your
used device, please use the return and collection systems, or contact
the retailer where the product was purchased. They can take this
product for environmental safe recycling.
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex
I(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and dened in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and is applied
only to equipment manufactured after 13 August 2005
Forma correcta de deshacerse de este producto. Esta marca indica que este producto
no debe arrojarse junto con otros desperdicios domésticos en ningún lugar de la Unión
Europea. Para evitar posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana debidos a
desechos no controlados de desperdicios, recíclelo responsablemente para promover
la reutilización sostenible de los recursos materiales. Para devolver su dispositivo
usado, utilice los sistemas de devolución recolección, o contacte con el vendedor
minorista donde compró el producto. Ellos pueden llevar este producto al reciclado
seguro para el medio ambiente.
Logotipo al que se hace referencia en la Directiva 2002/96/EC
AnexoIV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 y denido en EN 50419: 2005
La barra es el símbolo para marcar los nuevos desechos y se aplica
solamente a equipamiento fabricado después del 13 de agosto de 2005
Recyclez correctement ce produit. Cette signalisation indique que ce produit ne
doit pas être jeté avec les autres déchets domestiques dans les pays de l’UE. Pour
éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé humaine par des décharges
sauvages, recyclez ce produit de manière responsable pour encourager la
réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Pour retourner votre appareil usé,
veuillez utiliser les systèmes de collecte et de retour, ou contactez le revendeur
à qui vous avez acheté le produit. Il prendra en charge ce produit de manière à
protéger l’environnement.
Logo documenté dans l’annexe de la Directive 2002/96/EC
IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 et déni par la norme EN 50419:2005
La barre est le symbole de signalisation des nouveaux déchets qui
s’applique uniquement aux équipements fabriqués après le 13 août 2005
Tuotteen oikea hävittäminen. Tämä merkki ilmaisee, että tuotetta ei saa hävittää muun
talousjätteen mukana EU:n alueella. Jotta estetään mahdolliset valvomattoman jätteiden
hävittämisen haitat ympäristölle tai ihmisten terveydelle, kierrätä tuote vastuullisesti ja
edistä materiaalien kestävää uudelleenkäyttöä. Voit palauttaa käytetyn laitteen käyttämällä
keräysjärjestelmiä tai ottamalla yhteyttä jälleenmyyjään, jolta laite ostettiin. He voivat
toimittaa tuotteen ympäristön kannalta turvalliseen kierrätykseen.
Logo viitattu direktiivin 2002/96/EY liitteen
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 mukaisesti, määritelty standardissa EN 50419: 2005
Palkki on uuden jätteen merkintäsymboli ja sitä käytetään vain 13. elokuuta
2005 jälkeen valmistetuissa laitteissa
Juiste verwijdering van dit product. Deze markering geeft aan dat dit product
nergens in de Europese Unie met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden afgevoerd.
Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of gezondheid door ongecontroleerde
afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, recycle het op een verantwoorde wijze om het
duurzame hergebruik van materiaalgrondstoffen te bevorderen. Om uw gebruikte
apparaat in te leveren, kunt u gebruik maken van de inlever- en verzamelsystemen
of contact opnemen met de verkoper waar het product is gekocht. Zij kunnen dit
product innemen voor het milieuvriendelijk recycling.
Het logo waarnaar wordt verwezen in de bijlage van Richtlijn 2002/96/EG
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 en omschreven in EN 50419: 2005
De balk is het symbool voor het markeren van nieuw afval en wordt
alleen toegepast op apparatuur dat is vervaardigd na 13 augustus 2005
正确处理此产品。此标志表明该产品在整个欧盟区内不应该与其他家居生
活废弃物一同处置。为防止因无控废弃物处置对环境或人类健康可能造成
的危害,请负责地回收并促进可重复使用的物质资源。要返还旧设备,请
使用退返收集系统,或联系购买此产品的零售商。他们会为环境安全回收
此产品。
标志参照 2002/96/EC 指令附录
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 EN 50419: 2005 定义
条码符号标示新废弃物,仅适用 2005 8 13 日后生产的设备
Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt umweltgerecht. Diese Kennzeichnung bedeutet,
dass das Produkt innerhalb der EU nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Zur Vermeidung von Umwelt- und Gesundheitsschäden durch unkontrollierte
Entsorgung recyceln Sie das Gerät bitte. Geben Sie das Gerät an einer Sammelstelle
für Elektroaltgeräte ab oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler.
Logo eingetragen in Richtlinie 2002/96/EC AnhangI
IV_(OJ(L)37/38, 13.02.03 und deniert in EN 50419: 2005
Der Balken ist das Symbol zur Kennzeichnung neuen Abfalls und wird nur
auf Geräten angebracht, die nach dem 13. August 2005 gefertigt wurden
Korrekt bortskaffande av denna produkt. Denna märkning betyder att
produkten inte skall bortskaffas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall i
hela EU. För att förhindra eventuella skador för miljön eller människors
hälsa från okontrollerat bortskaffande av avfall, återvinn det ansvarsfullt för
att främja hållbar återanvändning av materiella resurser. För att returnera
din använda enhet, använd återanvändnings- och uppsamlingssystem,
eller kontakta den återförsäljare där produkten köptes. De kan ta hand om
denna produkt för miljösäker återvinning.
Logotyp som hänvisas till i direktiv 2002/96/EG bilaga
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 och denieras i EN 50419: 2005
Stapeln är symbolen för märkning av nytt avfall och är endast
tillämplig på utrustning som tillverkats efter 13 augusti, 2005
Corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto. Questo simbolo indica che questo prodotto
non deve essere smaltito insieme ad altri riuti domestici in tutta Europa. Per
prevenire possibili danni all’ambiente o alla salute umana dovuti allo smaltimento non
regolamentato dei riuti, è necessario riciclarlo responsabilmente al ne di promuovere
il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Per restituire il dispositivo usato, utilizzare
i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta o contattare il rivenditore presso il quale il prodotto è
stato acquistato. Quest’ultimo può occuparsi del riciclaggio ambientale sicuro di questo
prodotto.
Simbolo presente nell’allegato IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 della direttiva 2002/96/
CE e denito nello standard EN 50419: 2005
La barra è il simbolo indicante un nuovo riuto ed è applicata esclusivamente ad
apparecchiature prodotte successivamente al 13 agosto 2005
Correct Disposal of this product. This marking indicates that this
product should not be disposed with other house hold wastes
throughout the EU. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, recycle it responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. To return your
used device, please use the return and collection systems, or contact
the retailer where the product was purchased. They can take this
product for environmental safe recycling.
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex
I(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and dened in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and is applied
only to equipment manufactured after 13 August 2005
Forma correcta de deshacerse de este producto. Esta marca indica que este producto
no debe arrojarse junto con otros desperdicios domésticos en ningún lugar de la Unión
Europea. Para evitar posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana debidos a
desechos no controlados de desperdicios, recíclelo responsablemente para promover
la reutilización sostenible de los recursos materiales. Para devolver su dispositivo
usado, utilice los sistemas de devolución recolección, o contacte con el vendedor
minorista donde compró el producto. Ellos pueden llevar este producto al reciclado
seguro para el medio ambiente.
Logotipo al que se hace referencia en la Directiva 2002/96/EC
AnexoIV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 y denido en EN 50419: 2005
La barra es el símbolo para marcar los nuevos desechos y se aplica
solamente a equipamiento fabricado después del 13 de agosto de 2005
Recyclez correctement ce produit. Cette signalisation indique que ce produit ne
doit pas être jeté avec les autres déchets domestiques dans les pays de l’UE. Pour
éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé humaine par des décharges
sauvages, recyclez ce produit de manière responsable pour encourager la
réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Pour retourner votre appareil usé,
veuillez utiliser les systèmes de collecte et de retour, ou contactez le revendeur
à qui vous avez acheté le produit. Il prendra en charge ce produit de manière à
protéger l’environnement.
Logo documenté dans l’annexe de la Directive 2002/96/EC
IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 et déni par la norme EN 50419:2005
La barre est le symbole de signalisation des nouveaux déchets qui
s’applique uniquement aux équipements fabriqués après le 13 août 2005
Tuotteen oikea hävittäminen. Tämä merkki ilmaisee, että tuotetta ei saa hävittää muun
talousjätteen mukana EU:n alueella. Jotta estetään mahdolliset valvomattoman jätteiden
hävittämisen haitat ympäristölle tai ihmisten terveydelle, kierrätä tuote vastuullisesti ja
edistä materiaalien kestävää uudelleenkäyttöä. Voit palauttaa käytetyn laitteen käyttämällä
keräysjärjestelmiä tai ottamalla yhteyttä jälleenmyyjään, jolta laite ostettiin. He voivat
toimittaa tuotteen ympäristön kannalta turvalliseen kierrätykseen.
Logo viitattu direktiivin 2002/96/EY liitteen
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 mukaisesti, määritelty standardissa EN 50419: 2005
Palkki on uuden jätteen merkintäsymboli ja sitä käytetään vain 13. elokuuta
2005 jälkeen valmistetuissa laitteissa
Juiste verwijdering van dit product. Deze markering geeft aan dat dit product
nergens in de Europese Unie met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden afgevoerd.
Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of gezondheid door ongecontroleerde
afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, recycle het op een verantwoorde wijze om het
duurzame hergebruik van materiaalgrondstoffen te bevorderen. Om uw gebruikte
apparaat in te leveren, kunt u gebruik maken van de inlever- en verzamelsystemen
of contact opnemen met de verkoper waar het product is gekocht. Zij kunnen dit
product innemen voor het milieuvriendelijk recycling.
Het logo waarnaar wordt verwezen in de bijlage van Richtlijn 2002/96/EG
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 en omschreven in EN 50419: 2005
De balk is het symbool voor het markeren van nieuw afval en wordt
alleen toegepast op apparatuur dat is vervaardigd na 13 augustus 2005
正确处理此产品。此标志表明该产品在整个欧盟区内不应该与其他家居生
活废弃物一同处置。为防止因无控废弃物处置对环境或人类健康可能造成
的危害,请负责地回收并促进可重复使用的物质资源。要返还旧设备,请
使用退返收集系统,或联系购买此产品的零售商。他们会为环境安全回收
此产品。
标志参照 2002/96/EC 指令附录
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 EN 50419: 2005 定义
条码符号标示新废弃物,仅适用 2005 8 13 日后生产的设备
Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt umweltgerecht. Diese Kennzeichnung bedeutet,
dass das Produkt innerhalb der EU nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Zur Vermeidung von Umwelt- und Gesundheitsschäden durch unkontrollierte
Entsorgung recyceln Sie das Gerät bitte. Geben Sie das Gerät an einer Sammelstelle
für Elektroaltgeräte ab oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler.
Logo eingetragen in Richtlinie 2002/96/EC AnhangI
IV_(OJ(L)37/38, 13.02.03 und deniert in EN 50419: 2005
Der Balken ist das Symbol zur Kennzeichnung neuen Abfalls und wird nur
auf Geräten angebracht, die nach dem 13. August 2005 gefertigt wurden
Korrekt bortskaffande av denna produkt. Denna märkning betyder att
produkten inte skall bortskaffas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall i
hela EU. För att förhindra eventuella skador för miljön eller människors
hälsa från okontrollerat bortskaffande av avfall, återvinn det ansvarsfullt för
att främja hållbar återanvändning av materiella resurser. För att returnera
din använda enhet, använd återanvändnings- och uppsamlingssystem,
eller kontakta den återförsäljare där produkten köptes. De kan ta hand om
denna produkt för miljösäker återvinning.
Logotyp som hänvisas till i direktiv 2002/96/EG bilaga
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 och denieras i EN 50419: 2005
Stapeln är symbolen för märkning av nytt avfall och är endast
tillämplig på utrustning som tillverkats efter 13 augusti, 2005
Corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto. Questo simbolo indica che questo prodotto
non deve essere smaltito insieme ad altri riuti domestici in tutta Europa. Per
prevenire possibili danni all’ambiente o alla salute umana dovuti allo smaltimento non
regolamentato dei riuti, è necessario riciclarlo responsabilmente al ne di promuovere
il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Per restituire il dispositivo usato, utilizzare
i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta o contattare il rivenditore presso il quale il prodotto è
stato acquistato. Quest’ultimo può occuparsi del riciclaggio ambientale sicuro di questo
prodotto.
Simbolo presente nell’allegato IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 della direttiva 2002/96/
CE e denito nello standard EN 50419: 2005
La barra è il simbolo indicante un nuovo riuto ed è applicata esclusivamente ad
apparecchiature prodotte successivamente al 13 agosto 2005
Correct Disposal of this product. This marking indicates that this
product should not be disposed with other house hold wastes
throughout the EU. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, recycle it responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. To return your
used device, please use the return and collection systems, or contact
the retailer where the product was purchased. They can take this
product for environmental safe recycling.
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex
I(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and dened in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and is applied
only to equipment manufactured after 13 August 2005
Forma correcta de deshacerse de este producto. Esta marca indica que este producto
no debe arrojarse junto con otros desperdicios domésticos en ningún lugar de la Unión
Europea. Para evitar posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana debidos a
desechos no controlados de desperdicios, recíclelo responsablemente para promover
la reutilización sostenible de los recursos materiales. Para devolver su dispositivo
usado, utilice los sistemas de devolución recolección, o contacte con el vendedor
minorista donde compró el producto. Ellos pueden llevar este producto al reciclado
seguro para el medio ambiente.
Logotipo al que se hace referencia en la Directiva 2002/96/EC
AnexoIV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 y denido en EN 50419: 2005
La barra es el símbolo para marcar los nuevos desechos y se aplica
solamente a equipamiento fabricado después del 13 de agosto de 2005
Recyclez correctement ce produit. Cette signalisation indique que ce produit ne
doit pas être jeté avec les autres déchets domestiques dans les pays de l’UE. Pour
éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé humaine par des décharges
sauvages, recyclez ce produit de manière responsable pour encourager la
réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Pour retourner votre appareil usé,
veuillez utiliser les systèmes de collecte et de retour, ou contactez le revendeur
à qui vous avez acheté le produit. Il prendra en charge ce produit de manière à
protéger l’environnement.
Logo documenté dans l’annexe de la Directive 2002/96/EC
IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 et déni par la norme EN 50419:2005
La barre est le symbole de signalisation des nouveaux déchets qui
s’applique uniquement aux équipements fabriqués après le 13 août 2005
Tuotteen oikea hävittäminen. Tämä merkki ilmaisee, että tuotetta ei saa hävittää muun
talousjätteen mukana EU:n alueella. Jotta estetään mahdolliset valvomattoman jätteiden
hävittämisen haitat ympäristölle tai ihmisten terveydelle, kierrätä tuote vastuullisesti ja
edistä materiaalien kestävää uudelleenkäyttöä. Voit palauttaa käytetyn laitteen käyttämällä
keräysjärjestelmiä tai ottamalla yhteyttä jälleenmyyjään, jolta laite ostettiin. He voivat
toimittaa tuotteen ympäristön kannalta turvalliseen kierrätykseen.
Logo viitattu direktiivin 2002/96/EY liitteen
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 mukaisesti, määritelty standardissa EN 50419: 2005
Palkki on uuden jätteen merkintäsymboli ja sitä käytetään vain 13. elokuuta
2005 jälkeen valmistetuissa laitteissa
Juiste verwijdering van dit product. Deze markering geeft aan dat dit product
nergens in de Europese Unie met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden afgevoerd.
Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of gezondheid door ongecontroleerde
afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, recycle het op een verantwoorde wijze om het
duurzame hergebruik van materiaalgrondstoffen te bevorderen. Om uw gebruikte
apparaat in te leveren, kunt u gebruik maken van de inlever- en verzamelsystemen
of contact opnemen met de verkoper waar het product is gekocht. Zij kunnen dit
product innemen voor het milieuvriendelijk recycling.
Het logo waarnaar wordt verwezen in de bijlage van Richtlijn 2002/96/EG
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 en omschreven in EN 50419: 2005
De balk is het symbool voor het markeren van nieuw afval en wordt
alleen toegepast op apparatuur dat is vervaardigd na 13 augustus 2005
正确处理此产品。此标志表明该产品在整个欧盟区内不应该与其他家居生
活废弃物一同处置。为防止因无控废弃物处置对环境或人类健康可能造成
的危害,请负责地回收并促进可重复使用的物质资源。要返还旧设备,请
使用退返收集系统,或联系购买此产品的零售商。他们会为环境安全回收
此产品。
标志参照 2002/96/EC 指令附录
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 EN 50419: 2005 定义
条码符号标示新废弃物,仅适用 2005 8 13 日后生产的设备
Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt umweltgerecht. Diese Kennzeichnung bedeutet,
dass das Produkt innerhalb der EU nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Zur Vermeidung von Umwelt- und Gesundheitsschäden durch unkontrollierte
Entsorgung recyceln Sie das Gerät bitte. Geben Sie das Gerät an einer Sammelstelle
für Elektroaltgeräte ab oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler.
Logo eingetragen in Richtlinie 2002/96/EC AnhangI
IV_(OJ(L)37/38, 13.02.03 und deniert in EN 50419: 2005
Der Balken ist das Symbol zur Kennzeichnung neuen Abfalls und wird nur
auf Geräten angebracht, die nach dem 13. August 2005 gefertigt wurden
Korrekt bortskaffande av denna produkt. Denna märkning betyder att
produkten inte skall bortskaffas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall i
hela EU. För att förhindra eventuella skador för miljön eller människors
hälsa från okontrollerat bortskaffande av avfall, återvinn det ansvarsfullt för
att främja hållbar återanvändning av materiella resurser. För att returnera
din använda enhet, använd återanvändnings- och uppsamlingssystem,
eller kontakta den återförsäljare där produkten köptes. De kan ta hand om
denna produkt för miljösäker återvinning.
Logotyp som hänvisas till i direktiv 2002/96/EG bilaga
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 och denieras i EN 50419: 2005
Stapeln är symbolen för märkning av nytt avfall och är endast
tillämplig på utrustning som tillverkats efter 13 augusti, 2005
Corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto. Questo simbolo indica che questo prodotto
non deve essere smaltito insieme ad altri riuti domestici in tutta Europa. Per
prevenire possibili danni all’ambiente o alla salute umana dovuti allo smaltimento non
regolamentato dei riuti, è necessario riciclarlo responsabilmente al ne di promuovere
il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Per restituire il dispositivo usato, utilizzare
i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta o contattare il rivenditore presso il quale il prodotto è
stato acquistato. Quest’ultimo può occuparsi del riciclaggio ambientale sicuro di questo
prodotto.
Simbolo presente nell’allegato IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 della direttiva 2002/96/
CE e denito nello standard EN 50419: 2005
La barra è il simbolo indicante un nuovo riuto ed è applicata esclusivamente ad
apparecchiature prodotte successivamente al 13 agosto 2005
Correct Disposal of this product. This marking indicates that this
product should not be disposed with other house hold wastes
throughout the EU. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, recycle it responsibly
to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. To return your
used device, please use the return and collection systems, or contact
the retailer where the product was purchased. They can take this
product for environmental safe recycling.
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex
I(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and dened in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and is applied
only to equipment manufactured after 13 August 2005
Forma correcta de deshacerse de este producto. Esta marca indica que este producto
no debe arrojarse junto con otros desperdicios domésticos en ningún lugar de la Unión
Europea. Para evitar posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana debidos a
desechos no controlados de desperdicios, recíclelo responsablemente para promover
la reutilización sostenible de los recursos materiales. Para devolver su dispositivo
usado, utilice los sistemas de devolución recolección, o contacte con el vendedor
minorista donde compró el producto. Ellos pueden llevar este producto al reciclado
seguro para el medio ambiente.
Logotipo al que se hace referencia en la Directiva 2002/96/EC
AnexoIV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 y denido en EN 50419: 2005
La barra es el símbolo para marcar los nuevos desechos y se aplica
solamente a equipamiento fabricado después del 13 de agosto de 2005
Recyclez correctement ce produit. Cette signalisation indique que ce produit ne
doit pas être jeté avec les autres déchets domestiques dans les pays de l’UE. Pour
éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé humaine par des décharges
sauvages, recyclez ce produit de manière responsable pour encourager la
réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Pour retourner votre appareil usé,
veuillez utiliser les systèmes de collecte et de retour, ou contactez le revendeur
à qui vous avez acheté le produit. Il prendra en charge ce produit de manière à
protéger l’environnement.
Logo documenté dans l’annexe de la Directive 2002/96/EC
IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 et déni par la norme EN 50419:2005
La barre est le symbole de signalisation des nouveaux déchets qui
s’applique uniquement aux équipements fabriqués après le 13 août 2005
Tuotteen oikea hävittäminen. Tämä merkki ilmaisee, että tuotetta ei saa hävittää muun
talousjätteen mukana EU:n alueella. Jotta estetään mahdolliset valvomattoman jätteiden
hävittämisen haitat ympäristölle tai ihmisten terveydelle, kierrätä tuote vastuullisesti ja
edistä materiaalien kestävää uudelleenkäyttöä. Voit palauttaa käytetyn laitteen käyttämällä
keräysjärjestelmiä tai ottamalla yhteyttä jälleenmyyjään, jolta laite ostettiin. He voivat
toimittaa tuotteen ympäristön kannalta turvalliseen kierrätykseen.
Logo viitattu direktiivin 2002/96/EY liitteen
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 mukaisesti, määritelty standardissa EN 50419: 2005
Palkki on uuden jätteen merkintäsymboli ja sitä käytetään vain 13. elokuuta
2005 jälkeen valmistetuissa laitteissa
Juiste verwijdering van dit product. Deze markering geeft aan dat dit product
nergens in de Europese Unie met ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden afgevoerd.
Om mogelijke schade aan het milieu of gezondheid door ongecontroleerde
afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, recycle het op een verantwoorde wijze om het
duurzame hergebruik van materiaalgrondstoffen te bevorderen. Om uw gebruikte
apparaat in te leveren, kunt u gebruik maken van de inlever- en verzamelsystemen
of contact opnemen met de verkoper waar het product is gekocht. Zij kunnen dit
product innemen voor het milieuvriendelijk recycling.
Het logo waarnaar wordt verwezen in de bijlage van Richtlijn 2002/96/EG
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 en omschreven in EN 50419: 2005
De balk is het symbool voor het markeren van nieuw afval en wordt
alleen toegepast op apparatuur dat is vervaardigd na 13 augustus 2005
正确处理此产品。此标志表明该产品在整个欧盟区内不应该与其他家居生
活废弃物一同处置。为防止因无控废弃物处置对环境或人类健康可能造成
的危害,请负责地回收并促进可重复使用的物质资源。要返还旧设备,请
使用退返收集系统,或联系购买此产品的零售商。他们会为环境安全回收
此产品。
标志参照 2002/96/EC 指令附录
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 EN 50419: 2005 定义
条码符号标示新废弃物,仅适用 2005 8 13 日后生产的设备
Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt umweltgerecht. Diese Kennzeichnung bedeutet,
dass das Produkt innerhalb der EU nicht mit dem Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf.
Zur Vermeidung von Umwelt- und Gesundheitsschäden durch unkontrollierte
Entsorgung recyceln Sie das Gerät bitte. Geben Sie das Gerät an einer Sammelstelle
für Elektroaltgeräte ab oder wenden Sie sich an Ihren Fachhändler.
Logo eingetragen in Richtlinie 2002/96/EC AnhangI
IV_(OJ(L)37/38, 13.02.03 und deniert in EN 50419: 2005
Der Balken ist das Symbol zur Kennzeichnung neuen Abfalls und wird nur
auf Geräten angebracht, die nach dem 13. August 2005 gefertigt wurden
Korrekt bortskaffande av denna produkt. Denna märkning betyder att
produkten inte skall bortskaffas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall i
hela EU. För att förhindra eventuella skador för miljön eller människors
hälsa från okontrollerat bortskaffande av avfall, återvinn det ansvarsfullt för
att främja hållbar återanvändning av materiella resurser. För att returnera
din använda enhet, använd återanvändnings- och uppsamlingssystem,
eller kontakta den återförsäljare där produkten köptes. De kan ta hand om
denna produkt för miljösäker återvinning.
Logotyp som hänvisas till i direktiv 2002/96/EG bilaga
IV(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 och denieras i EN 50419: 2005
Stapeln är symbolen för märkning av nytt avfall och är endast
tillämplig på utrustning som tillverkats efter 13 augusti, 2005
Corretto smaltimento di questo prodotto. Questo simbolo indica che questo prodotto
non deve essere smaltito insieme ad altri riuti domestici in tutta Europa. Per
prevenire possibili danni all’ambiente o alla salute umana dovuti allo smaltimento non
regolamentato dei riuti, è necessario riciclarlo responsabilmente al ne di promuovere
il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Per restituire il dispositivo usato, utilizzare
i sistemi di restituzione e raccolta o contattare il rivenditore presso il quale il prodotto è
stato acquistato. Quest’ultimo può occuparsi del riciclaggio ambientale sicuro di questo
prodotto.
Simbolo presente nell’allegato IV_(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 della direttiva 2002/96/
CE e denito nello standard EN 50419: 2005
La barra è il simbolo indicante un nuovo riuto ed è applicata esclusivamente ad
apparecchiature prodotte successivamente al 13 agosto 2005
FCC Compliancy Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, that may cause undesired operation.
Warning: Changes or modications to the equipment not approved by Peavey Electronics Corp. can
void the user’s authority to use the equipment.
Note - This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Peavey Electronics Corporation • 5022 Hartley Peavey Drive • Meridian, MS • 39305
(601) 483-5365 • FAX (601) 486-1278 • www.peavey.com • 80305796 • ©2011
CAN ICES-3 B/NMB/3B
FCC Compliancy Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, that may cause undesired operation.
Warning: Changes or modications to the equipment not approved by Peavey Electronics Corp. can
void the user’s authority to use the equipment.
Note - This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Peavey Electronics Corporation • 5022 Hartley Peavey Drive • Meridian, MS • 39305
(601) 483-5365 • FAX (601) 486-1278 • www.peavey.com • 80305796 • ©2011
CAN ICES-3 B/NMB/3B
FCC Compliancy Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, that may cause undesired operation.
Warning: Changes or modications to the equipment not approved by Peavey Electronics Corp. can
void the user’s authority to use the equipment.
Note - This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Peavey Electronics Corporation • 5022 Hartley Peavey Drive • Meridian, MS • 39305
(601) 483-5365 • FAX (601) 486-1278 • www.peavey.com • 80305796 • ©2011
CAN ICES-3 B/NMB/3B
Congratulations! You have just purchased the world’s finest portable PA system. The Escorts integrated design allows for ease
of transport, while its user-friendly controls offer ease of operation, making it the perfect choice for schools, churches, civic
organizations as well as DJ’s and small musical groups. The Escort features dual two-way speakers driven by a seven-channel,
powered mixer, making it ideal for vocal, musical and DJ applications. The mixer includes a media channel with several inputs for
multiple playback options, as well as professional quality features such as a digital effects section, footswitchable effects defeat
and a master seven-band graphic EQ with FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System). The carrying case provides additional storage for
microphones, cables and whatever optional gear may be required. The Escort’s case provides latches for mounting for speakers,
multiple handles for various carrying options, and wheels for easy transport. Please read these instructions carefully and enjoy your
new Peavey Escort 3000.
Portable Pro Audio System
Features:
• Convenient package with luggage-style wheels
Two-way speaker system with 10” woofer and piezoelectric horn
• Seven-channel powered mixer
• USB MP3 playback
• High quality digital eects
• 6x XLR - 1/4” combination inputs
• Stereo RCA, 3.5mm, and USB media inputs for media playback
• Seven-band graphic EQ with FLS
Two folding speaker stands
• 2x 15’ speaker cables
• Storage compartments for microphones, cables, etc.
• Footswitchable eects defeat
• PV microphone and cable*
• Mixer stand*
* Indicates optional features. Available on certain models
Escort
®
3000
ENGLISH
Much of the setup of the Escort
®
is similar to the setup of other sound systems, and many aspects require plain common sense.
Safety should always be your rst concern. Always use grounded outlets and three-wire extension cords. Run sound system cables
in a way to prevent the danger of tripping and tape them down if needed. Place the speaker stands and mixer on a solid, level
surface. Following these guidelines will help prevent personal injury and equipment damage, ensuring years of trouble-free use.
THINK SAFETY FIRST!
Setup Guide
Setting Up Mixer and Speakers
Place closed unit so speakers are upward. Release latches by lifting up until the latch disengages. Remove the speakers from the case.
NOTE: The latches can be closed after speakers are removed. This is recommended to avoid interference with removal of other
components. This will also help avoid damage to the latches. Close the latch by pushing in until it is ush with the side of the case, then
push down until it locks.
Remove the speaker stands from the case. Be sure the legs on the stand are fully extended to provide a stable base for the speakers and are
positioned on a level surface. Tighten the thumbscrew on the base so that it is snug, but do not overtighten (Fig.1). Raise the speaker stands to
the desired height, tighten the thumbscrew and install the safety pin as shown (Fig.2).
WARNING! Only connect the included speakers to the mixer. Escort
speakers provide optimal load for the powered mixer and using
other speakers may result in equipment damage.
Place speakers on stands and position them so that they will face toward the audience and away from the microphones (Fig.3). Connect speaker
cables from the jack on the lower front of the speaker to the speaker outputs on the back of the mixer. Connect the left speaker to the LEFT
OUTPUT and the right speaker to the RIGHT OUTPUT (Fig.4).
Fig. 3
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
OR
Connecting Power
WARNING! Before connecting power make sure the power
switch is in the OFF position.
Connecting Media Playback Sources
The Escort powered mixer will accept various media playback devices. For connecting
CD player or grounded record player use the CHANNEL 7 RCA Left and Right
connections. For connecting an MP3 player or smartphone with media playback use
the 3.5mm stereo connector. This will require a stereo 3.5 mm cable (03007820)
which can be found at your local Peavey dealer. When using a USB memory stick with
MP3 or other audio les stored on it, insert the memory stick into the USB connector
on CHANNEL 7 and use the screen and controls in the master section to navigate and
play back audio les(Fig.7).
Connect the IEC power cord to the receptacle on the back panel of the unit
as shown (Fig.8), and then to a suitable electrical outlet. If an extension
cord is required, make sure it is a three-wire cord with an intact ground pin
to preserve the safety ground.
NOTE: FOR UK ONLY
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond
with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
(1) The wire that is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal
that is marked by the letter E, or by the Earth symbol, or coloured green or green
and yellow. (2) The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that
is marked with the letter N, or the colour black. (3) The wire that is coloured brown
must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L, or the colour red.
Connecting Microphone(s) or Line Input(s)
The Escorts powered mixer is designed to work with any good-quality, balanced, dynamic or condenser microphone such as Peaveys PV
®
i
series of microphones. Connect the microphone to the XLR (three-pin) input connector as shown (Fig.5). If using multiple microphones, connect
them in the order they will be on stage for easy adjustment to each microphone. To connect a line level device such as a keyboard, use a 1/4”
instrument cable and insert into the center of the XLR-1/4” combo connector as shown (Fig.6).
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
Setting Controls and Turning Unit On
Before turning on power, make sure all speakers, microphones, and other input
devices are connected. Set Master section controls to the 12 o’clock position
and all other controls all the way down, (rotated fully to the left). Turn power on
by placing the ON/OFF switch located on the back of the mixer (Fig.9) in the ON
position.
Adjusting Gain and Volume Controls
The optimal setting for the powered mixer and included speakers is marked on the
MASTER LEVEL control (Fig.10). Adjust the CHANNEL LEVEL control (Fig.11) until the
desired volume is achieved. If the desired volume is reached with the CHANNEL LEVEL
turned down to one of the rst three positions, turn the MASTER LEVEL down so you
can turn the CHANNEL LEVEL up. If the desired volume is achieved when the CHANNEL
LEVEL is close to max then raise the MASTER LEVEL so you can lower the CHANNEL
LEVEL. These are the same as any basic mixer functions.
Adjusting Tone Controls
For each active channel adjust the HIGH, MID-MORPH
®
, and LOW controls to achieve
desired sound (Fig. 11). Use moderation when making these adjustments, as extreme
high settings of any of these controls can lead to a distortion of the sound and an
increased chance of feedback on microphone inputs.
HIGH
This High EQ shelving type of active tone control varies the treble
frequencies (+/- 15dB at 12kHz) and is designed to remove
noise or add brilliance to the signal, depending on the quality of
the source.
MID-MORPH
Where most mid-range controls work at just one frequency, the
Mid-Morph works at two. When turned to the left, it cuts
at 250 Hz to reduce frequencies that muddy the sound. When
turned to the right, it boosts at 4 kHz to add intelligibility to
vocals. Either way, improved vocal or instrument denition can
be achieved.
LOW
A shelving type of EQ that varies the bass frequency levels (+/-
15dB at 80Hz). Low EQ adds depth to thin-sounding signals or
cleans up the muddy ones. As with any EQ, use sparingly. Too
much of this EQ can give you a booming bottom end.
Basic Operation:
Adjusting Effect Settings
The Escort has built-in digital eects. These eects can be selected in the MASTER
section by turning the EFFECTS SELECT knob left or right until the desired eect is shown
on the display (Fig.12). Once the desired eect is displayed on the screen push the
knob in to select and activate the eect. To adjust the eect parameter simply press the
PARAMETER ADJUST button (Fig.12) the available parameter and its adjustments will be
shown on the display. Turn the EFFECTS SELECT knob left or right to adjust the parameter
then press the PARAMETER ADJUST button or the EFFECTS SELECT knob to return to the
eects select screen. To hear more or less of the eect, on any given channel, turn the
CHANNEL EFX knob to the left to hear less of the eect, and to the right to hear more
of the eect (Fig.13). The EFX MUTE button in the master section (Fig.12) will mute the
eects on all channels. There are no eects on the media channels.
Footswitchable Effects Defeat
Your new Escort has a footswitchable eects defeat. This allows the user to mute
the eects on all channels by use of a single button footswitch such as the Peavey
Momentary Single-Button Switch (03050680) which can be purchased at your local
Peavey dealer. Insert the 1/4” plug from the footswitch into the EFFECTS DEFEAT jack on
the rear of the Escort mixer (Fig.14). Once connected, pressing the footswitch button will
toggle the EFX MUTE (Fig.12).
Effects:
Available Effects and Parameters
On Screen Name Effect Available Parameter
1 REV Plate Br1 Plate Reverb Bright Time
2 REV Plate Br2 Plate Reverb Gentle Low-Pass Time
3 REV Plate Med Plate Reverb Medium Low-Pass Time
4 REV Plate Dk1 Plate Reverb Hard Low-Pass Time
5 REV Plate Dk2 Plate Reverb Dark Time
6 REV Vocal Hall Reverb Vocal Time
7 REV Vocal Big Hall Reverb Vocal Huge Time
8 REV Vox Warm Hall Reverb Vocal Glow Time
9 REV Strings Hall Reverb Strings Time
10 REV Lg Brass Hall Reverb Brass Hall Time
11 REV Vox Air Room Reverb Vocal Air Time
12 REV Vox Club Room Reverb Vocal Club Time
13 REV Snare Room Reverb Snare Low Time
14 REV Ac Guitar Room Reverb Acoustic Guitar Time
15 REV Sm Brass Room Reverb Brass Time
16 ENH Tube Enhancer Tube Distortion Brightness
17 ENH Vocal 1 Vocal Enhancer Vox Brightness
18 ENH Vocal 2 Vocal Enhancer Vox Medium Brightness
19 DLY Double Delay Double Time
20 DLY Slap Delay Slapback Time
21 DLY BRT 1 Delay Bright, Few Repeats Time
22 DLY BRT 2 Delay Bright, More Repeats Time
23 DLY BRT 3 Delay Bright, Most Repeats Time
24 DLY Dark 1 Delay Dark, Few Repeats Time
25 DLY Dark 2 Delay Dark, More Repeats Time
26 DLY Dark 3 Delay Dark, Most Repeats Time
27 CHO Deep Slow Chorus High Depth, Slow Rate Rate
28 CHO Mod Wide Chorus Moderate Depth, Wide Rate Rate
29 CHO Shrt Wide Chorus Short Depth, Wide Rate Rate
30 CHO Shrt Fast Chorus Short Depth, Fast Rate Rate
31 CHO Deep Mod Chorus High Depth, Moderate Rate Rate
Playback from Media Source
Hook up your media source device as mentioned previously. When using RCA jacks
for a CD player, record player, or tape machine make sure the button is in the raised
position so these jacks are active (Fig.15). Which inputs are active will also be
displayed on the screen in the master section. Use the controls on the source device
for play, stop, forward and reverse functions. Adjust channel 7 controls on the Escort
mixer for desired sound. For media playback using an MP3 player, smartphone, or
other similar device make sure the button stays in the raised position. Connect
using a stereo 3.5mm cable mentioned previously and use the source device for
playback controls. When a device is connected to the 3.5mm jack the RCA jacks are
automatically disabled. For MP3 or audio le playback from a USB memory stick, make
sure the button is in the down position (Fig.16) so the USB plug is active.
NOTE: The Escort does not allow playback through multiple media inputs
simultaneously.
With your USB device attached, use the MEDIA SELECT knob (Fig.17) to navigate
through your audio les. Once the desired le is displayed on the screen press the
MEDIA SELECT knob to cue that le. Use the controls on the mixer for play, pause,
forward and reverse. If you do not choose to navigate or select a certain le the Escort
will play the les in the order they are stored on your USB memory device.
Non-audio les will show up in your navigation but will have no audio playback if
selected. Only audio les can be selected for playback.
Supported Audio File Types
.WAV
.MP3
.WMA
MEDIA:
Using the Graphic Equalizer
Unlike the HIGH, MID-MORPH, and LOW controls on each channel that adjust only the tone
of their own input signals, the seven-band graphic equalizer adjusts the tonal balance of
all the signals going through the powered mixer. This graphic equalizer is also a powerful
tool to help reduce or eliminate acoustic feedback. This oers the user great exibility in
adjusting the sound, but use moderation in making these adjustments.
FLS
®
Feedback Locating System
The FLS (Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to
reduce/eliminate feedback. Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound
heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the speakers re-entering the
microphones. To use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig.18) to 0.
Then before the audience arrives, increase the MASTER LEVEL and/or CHANNEL LEVEL
until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower the corresponding
slider. This reduces gain at the feedback frequency and can be repeated if necessary to
improve gain before feedback. Only adjust the sliders a small amount to avoid adversely
aecting sound quality.
EQUALIZATION:
GENERAL USE TIPS:
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
When encountering feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the mics and speakers in the system before resorting
to equalization (EQ) adjustments. Make sure that the speakers are positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the
microphones. Position mics as close to the sound source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the
system without having to turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and each mic must then be
turned down to prevent feedback. However, if you have diculty balancing the level of dierent individuals with one mic or if you still cannot
get sucient gain, using more mics can oer an advantage. For example, giving several singers their own microphone allows placement of
the microphones much closer to each singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental eect from
using multiple mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Packing the Escort
®
One of the Escorts many benets is that the entire sound system can be packed inside its easily transportable case (Fig.19). Begin by folding
the speaker stands, then secure them into their storage compartment using the two straps. Place the optional microphone(s) in their storage
compartment, putting the cables in the other compartment or with the speaker stands. Lay the speakers face down on top of the bottom tray
and secure the four latches. The Escort is now ready to be carried or pulled on its built-in, luggage-style wheels.
Fig. 19
OPTIONS:
WARNING: For safety, be sure to fully open the mixer stand and place it on a stable, level surface.
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Optional Accessories (available from local Peavey dealer)
Microphone Stands - Tripod mic stand with boom (00722910)
Additional Microphones and Cables - PVi
®
2 mic with cable included (00496360)
Microphone Wind Screens - Black wind screen (00069100)
Additional Speaker Cables in Various Lengths - 25’ 16 AWG (00060450)
Additional Speaker Stands in Various Sizes - Black Speaker Stand (00722890)
Audio Cables for CD Player, Record Player, Tape Machine, or MP3 Player/Smartphone Hook-up
Optional Mixer Stand Assembly (00496340)
Remove the mixer stand from the case. The mixer stand consists of three parts: two pairs of legs and the stand cross-members (Fig.20). Hold
the stand cross-member with the leg sockets together as shown (Fig.21). Fully insert one set of legs into the cross-members (Fig.22). Still
holding the cross members together, set the legs on the oor and insert the second pair of legs. If you need to move the stand, carry it folded
by holding the legs.
Escort
®
3000 Specifications:
Output Power: 80 watts RMS (per channel)
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 kHz +/-3 dB
Overload Protection: 10 dB of DDT
that limits the PA output to prevent
clipping that can damage the speakers
Distortion: Less than 0.2% THD @ Max power
Signal/Noise Ratio: 88 dB mic input typical
AC Power: 115 V AC 60 Hz or
230 V AC 50/60 Hz
Weight Assembled: 50 lbs. (22.67 kg)
(stands included)
Dimensions: 14.5” H x 36.75” W x 15.5” D
(36.8 cm x 93.3 cm x 39.4 cm)
Speakers: Woofer 10” (254 mm)
Piezoelectric Horn Tweeter
Phantom Power: 15VDC Available on all XLR Inputs
Escort
®
3000 Troubleshooting Guide
Problem Check Correction
No sound
(LCD not lit)
Is power switch on?
Is line cord connected to live power outlet?
Turn power switch on
Connect power cord to live outlet
No sound
(LCD not lit)
Are MASTER and CHANNEL GAIN controls up? Adjust both MASTER and CHANNEL
LEVEL controls upward to desired
level. Check speaker connections.
Turn mic switch on. Check mic or
sound source connection.
No Eects
Files on USB memory device will not
play back
If it goes away when the CHANNEL or MASTER LEVEL
controls are turned down, then it is acoustic feedback.
Make sure desired eect is selected
in Master eect menu. Check the
master EFX MUTE. If the LED is
illuminated the EFX MUTE is active.
Press the EFX MUTE button once to
disable. Adjust channel EFX control
until audio eect is heard.
Make sure once MEDIA SELECT knob
is rotated to display desired le
the knob is then pressed to cue the
le. Make sure your audio les are
the correct format. See the list of
supported audio formats mentioned
previously in this manual.
Are the channel EFX controls turned up?
Is the master EFX MUTE enabled?
Is an eect activated in menu?
Is the le cued for playback?
Are the audio les the proper format?
Loud howling or squeal from speakers
Reduce microphone gain. Reposition
microphone behind or farther
from speakers. Observe FLS light
above EQ and reduce level of
corresponding slider.
Sound is distorted Is the CHANNEL GAIN at a very high setting? Reduce CHANNEL GAIN and increase
MASTER VOLUME
¡Felicidades! Acaba de comprar el mejor sistema PA portátil del mundo. El diseño integrado del Escort facilita la transportación,
al mismo tiempo que sus controles amigables hacen fácil su operación, convirtiéndolo en la elección perfecta para escuelas,
iglesias, organizaciones cívicas, DJ y pequeños grupos musicales. El Escort presenta dos altavoces de dos vías accionados por un
mezclador amplificado de siete canales, por lo que es ideal para aplicaciones vocales, musicales y de DJ. El mezclador incluye un
canal de medios con varias entradas para múltiples opciones de reproducción, así como funciones de calidad profesional tales
como sección de efectos digitales, anulación de efectos mediante interruptor de pie y un gráfico master de siete bandas con
FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System). La maleta de transportación proporciona almacenamiento adicional para micrófonos, cables
y cualquier accesorio adicional que pueda ser necesario. La maleta del Escort proporciona cierres para el montaje de altavoces,
múltiples agarraderas para diferentes opciones de transportación y ruedas para facilitar el transporte. Lea cuidadosamente estas
instrucciones y disfrute de su nuevo Peavey Escora 3000.
Sistema de audio portátil profesional
Características:
• Embalajecómodoconruedasestiloequipaje
• Sistemadealtavocesdedosvíasconaltavozdebajosybocinapiezoeléctricade10"
• Mezcladoramplicadodesietecanales
• ReproducciónMP3USB
• Efectosdigitalesdealtacalidad
• 6entradasdecombinaciónXLR–1/4"
• EntradasdemediosRCAestéreo,3,5mmyUSBparasureproducción
• EQgrácodesietebandasconFLS
• Dosplataformasplegablesparalosaltavoces
• 2Cablesde15piesparaaltavoces
• Compartimientosdealmacenamientoparamicrófonos,cables,etc.
• Anulacióndeefectosmedianteinterruptordepie
• MicrófonoycablePV*
• Soportedemezclador*
* Indicacaracterísticasopcionales.Disponibleenciertosmodelos
Escort
®
3000
ESPAÑOL
LamayoríadelosajustesdelEscora
®
sonsimilaresalosdeotrossistemasdesonidoymuchosdeellosrequierensimplemente
delsentidocomún.Laseguridaddebesersiempresuprimerapreocupación.Usesiempretomasdecorrienteconconexiónatierra
ycablesdeextensióndetresconductores.Dispongaloscablesdelsistemadesonidodeformataldeevitarelpeligrodeque
setropiececonélyáteloconcintasadhesivassiesnecesario.Coloquelasplataformasdelosaltavocesyelmezcladorenuna
superciesólidaynivelada.Seguirestaspautasayudaráaevitarlesionespersonalesydañosalequipamiento,asegurandoaños
deusosinproblemas.
¡PIENSE PRIMERO EN LA SEGURIDAD!
Guía de configuración
Configuración del mezclador y de los altavoces
Coloque la unidad cerrada de manera que los altavoces queden hacia arriba. Libere los cierres elevándolos hasta que se desacoplen. Retire los
altavoces de la maleta.
NOTA:Loscierrespuedencerrarsedespuésderetirarlosaltavoces.Serecomiendaevitarlainterferenciaconlaremocióndeotros
componentes.Estotambiénayudaráaevitardañosaloscierres.Apliqueelcierreempujándolohastaqueestéalrasconelladodela
maleta,entonceshaciaabajohastaqueajuste.
Retire las plataformas de los altavoces de la maleta. Asegúrese de que las patas de las plataformas estén totalmente extendidas para
proporcionar una base estable para los altavoces y de que estén colocadas sobre una superficie nivelada. Apriete el tornillo de ajuste
manual en la base de manera que esté ajustado, pero no lo apriete en exceso (Fig. 1). Eleve las plataformas de los altavoces hasta la altura
deseada, apriete el tornillo de ajuste manual e instale el pasador de seguridad como se muestra (Fig. 2).
¡ADVERTENCIA!Conectesolamentelosaltavocesqueseincluyen
conelmezclador.LosaltavocesEscortproporcionanunacarga
óptimaparaelmezcladoramplicadoyelusodeotrosaltavoces
puededarcomoresultadoeldañoalequipamiento.
Coloque los altavoces sobre las plataformas y posiciónelos de manera que queden dirigidos hacia el público y lejos de los micrófonos (Fig. 3).
Conecte los cables de los altavoces desde el conector de la parte delantera inferior del altavoz hasta las salidas para altavoces de la parte
trasera del mezclador. Conecte el altavoz izquierdo a la SALIDA IZQUIERDA y el altavoz derecho a la SALIDA DERECHA (Fig. 4).
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
o
Inserte aquí los enchufes de los
altavoces
Conexión de la alimentación
¡ADVERTENCIA!Antesdeconectarlaalimentación,
asegúresedequeelinterruptordealimentaciónestéenla
posiciónOFF.
Conexión de fuentes de reproducción de medios
El mezclador amplificado del Escort aceptará varios dispositivos de reproducción de
medios. Para la conexión de un reproductor de CD o un reproductor de grabaciones
con conexión a tierra, use las conexiones Izquierda y Derecha RCA del CANAL 7. Para la
conexión de un reproductor MP3 o de un smartphone con la reproducción de medios, use
el conector estéreo de 3,5 mm. Esto requerirá un cable estéreo de 3,5 mm (03007820),
que puede obtener de su distribuidor local de Peavey. Cuando utilice una memoria USB
con MP3 u otros archivos de audio almacenados en él, inserte la memoria en el conector
USB del CANAL 7 y use la pantalla y los controles de la sección master para navegar y
reproducir los archivos de audio (Fig. 7).
Conecte el cable de alimentación IEC en el receptáculo del panel trasero
de la unidad como se muestra (Fig. 8) y entonces a una toma de corriente
adecuada. Si se requiere un cable de extensión, asegúrese de que sea un
cable de tres conductores con una clavija de tierra intacta para preservar la
tierra de seguridad.
NOTE: FOR UK ONLY
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond
with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
(1) The wire that is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal
that is marked by the letter E, or by the Earth symbol, or coloured green or green
and yellow. (2) The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that
is marked with the letter N, or the colour black. (3) The wire that is coloured brown
must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L, or the colour red.
Conexión de los micrófonos o de las entradas de línea
El mezclador amplificado del Escort está diseñado para trabajar con cualquier micrófono balanceado de buena calidad, dinámico o de
condensador, tales como los micrófonos de la serie PVi
®
de Peavey. Conecte el micrófono al conector de entrada XLR (de tres clavijas) como se
muestra (Fig. 5). Si se están utilizando múltiples micrófonos, conéctelos en el orden en que estarán en el escenario para la facilidad de ajuste
de cada micrófono. Para conectar un dispositivo de nivel de línea, tal como un teclado, use un cable de 1/4" para instrumentos e insértelo en
el centro del conector combinado XLR-1/4", como se muestra (Fig. 6).
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
Inserte aquí el dispositivo USB
Use el botón para examinar los archivos
de medios
Inserte aquí el cable de alimentación
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Pulse de botón “hacia
adentro” para activar el USB
Ajuste de los controles y encendido de la unidad
Antes de encender la alimentación, asegúrese de que estén conectados todos
los altavoces, micrófonos y otros dispositivos de entrada. Ajuste los controles
de la sección Master en la posición de las 12 y media y todos los otros controles
completamente bajos (girados completamente hacia la izquierda). Encienda la
alimentación colocando el interruptor ON/OFF ubicado en la parte trasera del
mezclador (Fig. 9) en la posición ON.
Ajuste de los controles de Ganancia y de Volumen
El ajuste óptimo del mezclador amplificado y de los altavoces incluidos está marcado
en el control MASTER LEVEL (Fig. 10). Ajuste el control CHANNEL LEVEL (Fig. 11) hasta
alcanzar el volumen deseado. Si el volumen deseado se alcanza con el CHANNEL
LEVEL colocado en una de las tres primeras posiciones, gire el MASTER LEVEL hacia
debajo de manera que pueda subir el CHANNEL LEVEL. Si el volumen deseado se
alcanza cuando el CHANNEL LEVEL está cerca del máximo, entonces eleve el MASTER
LEVEL de manera que pueda bajar el CHANNEL LEVEL. Son las mismas funciones de
cualquier mezclador básico.
Ajuste de los controles de tono
Para cada canal activo, ajuste los controles HIGH, MID-MORPH
®
y LOW para alcanzar
el sonido deseado Fig. 11). Sea moderado al hacer estos ajustes, ya que los niveles
demasiado elevados de cualquiera de estos controles puede llevar a una distorsión
del sonido y a una mayor probabilidad de realimentación en las entradas de
micrófono.
HIGH
Este EQ High escalonado de control de tono activo varía las frecuencias de
agudos (+/- 15dB a 12kHz) y está diseñado para eliminar el ruido o añadir
brillo a la señal, dependiendo de la calidad de la fuente.
MID-MORPH
Donde la mayoría de los controles de rango medio trabajan sólo a una
frecuencia, el Mid-Morph trabaja a dos. Cuando se gira hacia la izquierda,
corta a 250 Hz para reducir las frecuencias que ensucian el sonido. Cuando
se gira a la derecha, refuerza a 4 kHz para añadir inteligibilidad a las
vocales. De una u otra manera, se puede alcanzar la definición vocal o
instrumental.
LOW
Un tipo de EQ escalonado que varía los niveles de frecuencia de los bajos
(+/-15 dB a 80 Hz). El EQ Low añade profundidad a las señales nítidas
o limpia las que están sucias. Como con cualquier otro EQ, úselo con
moderación. Demasiado uso de este EQ puede darle unas bajas frecuencias
retumbantes.
Operación básica:
Los círculos vacíos indican el rango óptimo
Controles de tono
Control Channel Level
Fig. 10
Fig. 9
Fig. 11
Ponga el interruptor en la posición ON
Ajuste de los efectos
El Escort tiene efectos digitales incorporados. Estos efectos pueden seleccionarse en
la sección MASTER girando el botón de EFFECTS SELECT hacia la izquierda o la derecha
hasta que se muestre en la pantalla el efecto deseado (Fig. 12). Una vez que se muestre
el efecto deseado en la pantalla, pulse el botón para seleccionar el efecto y activarlo.
Para ajustar el parámetro de efecto, simplemente pulse el botón PARAMETER ADJUST
(Fig. 12); el parámetro disponible y sus ajustes se mostrarán en la pantalla. Gire el
botón EFFECTS SELECT hacia la izquierda o la derecha para ajustar el parámetro; a
continuación pulse el botón PARAMETER ADJUST o el botón EFFECTS SELECT para
regresar a la pantalla de selección de efectos. Para escuchar más o menos el efecto,
en cualquier canal dado, gire el botón CHANNEL EFX hacia la izquierda para escuchar
menos el efecto y hacia la derecha para escucharlo más (Fig. 13). El botón EFX MUTE de
la sección Master (Fig. 12) silenciará los efectos en todos los canales. En los canales de
medios no hay efectos.
Anulación de efectos mediante interruptor de pie
Su nuevo Escort permite la anulación de efectos por interruptor de pie. Esto permite que
el usuario silencie los efectos en todos los canales mediante el uso de un interruptor de
pie de un único botón, tal como el Interruptor Momentáneo de Simple Botón de Peavey
(03050680), que puede comprarse en su distribuidor local de Peavey. Inserte el enchufe
de 1/4" del interruptor de pie en el conector EFFECTS DEFEAT en la parte trasera del
mezclador Escort (Fig. 14). Una vez conectado, al pulsar el botón del interruptor de pie se
alternará EFX MUTE (Fig. 12).
Efectos disponibles y parámetros
Nombre en pantalla Efecto Parámetro Disponible
1 REV Plate Br1 Plate Reverb Bright Tiempo
2 REV Plate Br2 Plate Reverb suave pasabajos Tiempo
3 REV Plate Med Plate Reverb medio pasabajos Tiempo
4 REV Plate Dk1 Plate Reverb fuerte pasabajos Tiempo
5 REV Plate Dk2 Plate Reverb Dark Tiempo
6 REV Vocal Hall Reverb Vocal Tiempo
7 REV Vocal Big Hall Reverb Vocal Huge Tiempo
8 REV Vox Warm Hall Reverb Vocal Glow Tiempo
9 REV Strings Hall Reverb Strings Tiempo
10 REV Lg Brass Hall Reverb Brass Hall Tiempo
11 REV Vox Air Room Reverb Vocal Air Tiempo
12 REV Vox Club Room Reverb Vocal Club Tiempo
13 REV Snare Room Reverb Snare Low Tiempo
14 REV Ac Guitar Room Reverb Acoustic Guitar Tiempo
15 REV Sm Brass Room Reverb Brass Tiempo
16 ENH Tube Enhancer Tube Distortion Brillo
17 ENH Vocal 1 Vocal Enhancer Vox Brillo
18 ENH Vocal 2 Vocal Enhancer Vox Medium Brillo
19 DLY Double Delay Double Tiempo
20 DLY Slap Delay Slapback Tiempo
21 DLY BRT 1 Delay Bright, pocas repeticiones Tiempo
22 DLY BRT 2 Delay Bright, más repeticiones Tiempo
23 DLY BRT 3 Delay Bright, la mayor cantidad de
repeticiones
Tiempo
24 DLY Dark 1 Delay Dark, pocas repeticiones Tiempo
25 DLY Dark 2 Delay Dark, más repeticiones Tiempo
26 DLY Dark 3 Delay Dark, la mayor cantidad de repeticiones Tiempo
27 CHO Deep Slow Chorus High Depth, ritmo lento Ritmo
28 CHO Mod Wide Chorus Moderate Depth, ritmo amplio Ritmo
29 CHO Shrt Wide Chorus Short Depth, ritmo amplio Ritmo
30 CHO Shrt Fast Chorus Short Depth, ritmo rápido Ritmo
31 CHO Deep Mod Chorus High Depth, ritmo moderado Ritmo
Efectos:
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Púlselo para entrar en el modo de ajuste de
parámetros
Control Channel Effects
Inserte aquí el enchufe del interruptor
de pie (Interruptor momentáneo de simple
botón Peavey 03050680)
Púlselo para SILENCIAR los efectos en todos los
canales
Gire el botón para encontrar el efecto, pulse el botón
“hacia adentro” para seleccionar el efecto y activarlo
Reproducción desde fuentes de medios
Conecte el dispositivo de fuente de medios como se indicó anteriormente. Cuando
se estén utilizando conectores RCA para un reproductor de CD, reproductor de
grabaciones, o máquina de cinta, asegúrese de que el botón esté en la posición
elevada de forma que estos conectores estén activos (Fig. 15). También se mostrará
en la pantalla de la sección Master cuáles entradas están activas. Use los controles
del dispositivo fuente para las funciones de reproducción, parada, avance y retroceso.
Ajuste los controles del Canal 7 del mezclador Escort para obtener el sonido deseado.
Para la reproducción de medios utilizando un reproductor MP3, smartphone u otro
dispositivo similar, asegúrese de que el botón permanezca en la posición elevada.
Conéctelos usando un cable estéreo de 3,5 mm mencionado anteriormente y use
el dispositivo fuente para controlar la reproducción. Cuando un dispositivo está
conectado al conector de 3,5 mm, los conectores RCA se inhabilitan automáticamente.
Para la reproducción de archivos MP3 o de audio desde una memoria USB, asegúrese
de que el botón esté en la posición hacia abajo (Fig. 16) de manera que el conector
USB esté activo.
NoTA:ElEscortnopermitelareproducciónsimultáneaatravésdemúltiplesentradas
demedios.
Con su dispositivo USB conectado, use el botón MEDIA SELECT (Fig. 17) para
desplazarse por sus archivos de audio. Una vez mostrado el archivo deseado en la
pantalla, pulse el botón MEDIA SELECT para marcar ese archivo. Use los controles
del mezclador para reproducir, introducir pausas, avanzar y retroceder. Si no elige
desplazarse o seleccionar un cierto archivo, el Escort reproducirá los archivos en el
orden en que estén guardados en su dispositivo de memoria USB.
Losarchivosquenoseandeaudiosemostrarándurantesunavegación,perono
produciránreproduccióndeaudiosiseseleccionan.Losúnicosarchivosquepueden
seleccionarseparasureproducciónsonlosdeaudio.
Tipos de archivos de audio que se soportan
.WAV
.MP3
.WMA
MEDIOSA:
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Fig. 15
Inserte aquí los enchufes RCA del dispositivo fuente
Inserte aquí el enchufe estéreo
de 3,5 mm del dispositivo fuente
Pulse el botón hasta que esté en la posición
“elevada” para activar los conectores
RCA/3,5 mm
Inserte aquí el dispositivo de memoria USB
Use el botón para examinar los archivos de
medios.
Pulse el botón “hacia adentro” para marcar el
archivo para reproducirlo.
Use los controles para
REPRODUCIR. PAUSA, AVANZAR y RETROCEDER
Pulse el botón “hacia adentro” para
activar el USB
Utilización del Graphic Equalizer
AdiferenciadeloscontrolesHIGH,MID-MORPHyLOWdecadacanalqueajustan
solamenteeltonodesuspropiasseñalesdeentrada,elecualizadorgrácodesiete
bandasajustaelbalancetonaldetodaslasseñalesquepasanatravésdelmezclador
amplicado.Esteecualizadorgrácoestambiénunaherramientaponderosapara
ayudarareduciroeliminarlarealimentaciónacústica.Estoleofrecealusuariouna
granexibilidadenelajustedelsonido,peroutilícelosconmoderaciónparahacer
estosajustes.
FLS
®
Feedback Locating System
LosindicadoresdelFLS(FeedbackLocatingSystem)sonherramientasvaliosaspara
ayudarareduciroeliminarlarealimentación.Larealimentaciónacústicaeselsonido
altoenformadeaullidoochillidoescuchadoatravésdelossistemasdesonidocomo
resultadodelsonidodelosaltavocesqueentrandenuevoenlosmicrófonos.Parausar
lafuncionalidadFLS,comiencecolocandotodoslosajustesdeslizantesdelEQgráco
(Fig.18)en0.Entonces,antesdequellegueelpúblico,aumenteelMASTERLEVELy/o
elCHANNELLEVELhastaqueocurralaalimentación.FíjeseencuálLEDseiluminay
bajeligeramenteelajustedeslizantecorrespondiente.Estoreducelagananciadela
frecuenciaderealimentaciónypuederepetirsesi
esnecesarioparamejorarlaganancia
antesdelarealimentación.Varíelosajustesdeslizantessolamenteunapequeña
cantidadparaevitarafectaradversamentelacalidaddelsonido.
ECUALIZACIÓN:
Cómo evitar la realimentación acústica
Cuandoocurralarealimentación,siempreesmejorcomenzarvariandolacolocacióndelosmicrófonosyaltavocesenelsistemaantesde
cambiarlosajustesdeecualización(EQ).Asegúresedequelosaltavocesesténcolocadosparadirigirelsonidohaciaelpúblicoyalejadode
losmicrófonos.Coloquelosmicrófonostancercadelafuentedesonidocomosearazonable.Alacercarelmicrófonoseaumentaelvolumen
delsonidoatravésdelsistemasintenerqueaumentarlaganancia.
Pautas para el uso de los micrófonos
Cuandoseapráctico,espreferibleusarunúnicomicrófono.Losmicrófonosadicionalesrecogenmássonidodelosaltavocesycada
micrófonodebeentoncesbajarseparaevitarlarealimentación.Noobstante,sitienedicultadesparabalancearelniveldediferentes
individuosconunmicrófonoysiaúnnopuedeobtenersucienteganancia,elempleodemásmicrófonospuedeserventajoso.Porejemplo,
darleavarioscantantessupropiomicrófonoacadaunopermitelacolocacióndelosmicrófonosmáscercadecadacantante.Estoaumenta
elvolumendelsonidoenelmicrófonoycompensaampliamentecualquierefectocontraproducentedelempleodemúltiplesmicrófonos.
Tambiénpermiteajustarporseparadoelvolumendecadamicrófonoparaobtenerunbalanceapropiado.
Embalaje del Escort
®
UnodelosmuchosbeneciosdelEscoraesquetodoelsistemadesonidopuedeembalarsedentrodesumaletadefáciltransportación
(Fig.19).Comienceplegandolasplataformasdelosaltavoces,acontinuaciónasegúrelasensucompartimientodealmacenamiento
usandolasdoscorreas.Coloquelosmicrófonosopcionalesensucompartimientodealmacenamiento,colocandoloscablesenelotro
compartimientooconlasplataformasdelosaltavoces.Coloquelosaltavocesconlapartedelanterahaciaabajosobrelapartesuperiordela
bandejainferioryasegureloscuatrocierres.ElEscortestáahoralistoparacargarseoparatirardeélusandosusruedasestiloequipajeque
tieneincorporadas.
Fig. 19
CONSEJOS PARA EL USO GENERAL:
Fig. 19
Fig. 18
Ajustes deslizantes del EQ en CERO
OPCIONES:
ADVERTENCIA: Porseguridad,abrabienlaplataformadelmezcladorycolóquelasobreunasuperficieestableynivelada.
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Accesorios opcionales (disponibles en su distribuidor Peavey local)
Soportesparamicrófonos-Soportedetrípodecombrazoextensible(00722910)
Micrófonosycablesadicionales–MicrófonoPVi
®
2concableincluido(00496360)
Pantallasdevientoparamicrófonos–Pantallaparavientonegra(00069100)
Cablesadicionalesparamicrófonosenvariaslongitudes–25pies16AWG(00060450)
Plataformasadicionalesparamicrófonosenvariostamaños–Plataformanegraparaaltavoz(00722890)
CablesdeaudioparalaconexióndereproductoresdeCD,reproductoresdegrabaciones,máquinasdecintaoReproductoresMP3/
Smartphones
Conjuntodeplataformaparamezcladoropcional(00496340)
Retirelaplataformadelmezcladordelamaleta.Laplataformadelmezcladorconsistedetrespartes:dosparesdepatasylosmiembros
transversalesdelaplataforma(Fig.20).Sostengaelmiembrotransversaljuntoconlosreceptáculosdelaspatasdelaformaenquese
muestra(Fig.21).Insertetotalmenteunjuegodepatasenlosmiembrostransversales(Fig.22).Sosteniendoaúnlosmiembrostransversales
juntos,coloquelaspatassobreelpisoeinserteelsegundojuegodepatas.Sinecesitamoverlaplataforma,llévelaplegadasosteniendolas
patas.
Fig. 20 Fig. 21 Fig. 22
Especificaciones del Escort
®
3000:
Potenciadesalida: 80wattsRMS(porcanal)
Respuestadefrecuencia: 40Hza20kHz+/-3dB
Proteccióncontrasobrecargas: 10dBdeDDT™quelimitanlasalidaPAparaevitarel
recortequepuededañarlosaltavoces.
Distorsión: Menosdel0,2%deTHDapotenciamáxima
Relaciónseñal/ruido: 88dBtípicaenentradademicrófono
AlimentacióndeCA 115VCA60Hzo
230VCA50/60Hz
Pesoensamblado:
(seincluyenlasplataformas)
50lbs.(22,67kg)
Dimensiones: 14.5"dealturax36.75"deanchox15.5"deprofundidad
(36.8cmx93.3cmx39.4cm)
Altavoces: Woofer10"(254mm)
Altavozdeagudosconbocinapiezoeléctrica
Guía para la solución de problemas del Escort
®
3000
Problema Comprobación Corrección
Nohaysonido
(lapantallaLCDnoestá
iluminada)
¿Estáencendidoelinterruptor?
¿Estáconectadoelcabledealimentaciónaunatoma
decorrienteactiva?
Enciendaelinterruptor.
Conecteelcabledealimentaciónaunatomade
corrienteactiva.
Nohaysonido
(lapantallaLCDnoestá
iluminada)
¿EstánaltosloscontrolesMASTERyCHANNELGAIN? AjusteloscontrolesMASTERyCHANNELLEVEL
haciaarribahastaelniveldeseado.Compruebe
lasconexionesdelaltavoz.Enciendaelinterruptor
delmicrófono.Compruebelaconexióndelmicró-
fonoolafuentedesonido.
Nohayefectos ¿EstánsubidosloscontrolesEFXdecanal?
¿EstáhabilitadoelEFXMUTEmaster?
¿Esunefectoactivadoenelmenú?
Asegúresedequeelefectodeseadoestáseleccio-
nadoenelmenúdeefectosdeMaster.Comprue-
beelEFXMUTE.SielLEDestáiluminado,elEFX
MUTEestáactivo.PulseunavezelbotónEFX
MUTEparainhabilitarlo.AjusteelcontrolEFXdel
canalhastaqueseoigaelefectodeaudio.
Losarchivosdeldispositi-
vodememoriaUSBnose
reproducen.
¿Estáelarchivomarcadoparalareproducción?
¿Losarchivosdeaudioestánenelformatoadecuado?
Asegúresedequeunavezquesegireelbotón
MEDIASELECTparamostrarelarchivodeseadose
pulseelbotónparamarcarelarchivo.Asegúrese
dequesusarchivosdeaudioesténenelformato
correcto.Consultelalistadeformatosdeaudio
soportadosmencionadosanteriormenteeneste
manual.
Sonidodeaullidoodechilli-
doaaltovolumenprocedente
delosaltavoces
SidesaparececuandosebajanloscontrolesCHANNEL
LEVELoMASTERLEVEL,entoncesesunarealimenta-
ciónacústica.
Reduzcalagananciadelosmicrófonos.Reubique
losmicrófonosdetrásomáslejosdelosaltavo-
ces.ObservelaluzFLSencimadelEQyreduzcael
niveldelajustedeslizantecorrespondiente.
Elsonidoestádistorsionado ¿CHANNELGAINestáenunajustemuyalto? ReduzcaCHANNELGAINyaumenteMASTER
VOLUME
Félicitations! Vous venez juste d’acquérir le meilleur système de sonorisation portable au monde. La conception intégrée du
système Escort facilite son transport, alors que ses commandes conviviales permettent une utilisation aisée, le rendant le choix
parfait pour les écoles, les églises, les organisations civiles et les petits groupes de musique. Le système Escort dispose de deux
haut-parleurs à deux-voies alimentés par un amplificateur-mixer à sept voies, le rendant idéal pour les applications vocales,
musicales et de DJ. Le mixer inclut une voie multimédia à plusieurs entrées pour prendre en charge de nombreuses sources de
reproduction, ainsi que des fonctionnalités de qualité professionnelle telles qu’une section d’effets numériques, d’annulation
d’effets par pédales et d’un égaliseur graphique principal à sept bandes avec le système FLS
®
(Système de localisation de
rétroaction). Le boîtier de transport fournit un espace de rangement supplémentaire pour les microphones, les câbles et de
n’importe quels dispositifs que vous pourriez avoir besoin. Le boîtier du système Escort présente des dispositifs de blocage de
fixation des enceintes, de nombreuses poignées et des roulettes pour faciliter le transport par différentes méthodes. Veuillez lire
attentivement ces instructions et tirer parti du meilleur de votre nouveau système Escort 3000 de chez Peavey.
Système Audio Professionnel Portable
Caractéristiques :
• Coffretpratiquedetypevaliseàroulettes
• Systèmed’enceintesàdeuxvoiesavecunhaut-parleurde254mmetunpavillonacoustiquepiézoélectrique
• Amplicateur-mixeràseptvoies
• LecteurMP3USB
• Effetsnumériquesdehautequalité
• 6xentréescombinéesXLRetde6,5mm
• PrisesRCAstéréo,de3,5mmetd’entréesmultimédiaUSBpourlalecturedechiersmultimédia
• ÉgaliseurgraphiqueàseptbandesavecsystèmeFLS
• Deuxsupportsdépliantsd’enceinte
• 2xcâblespourenceinted’environ4,5m
• Compartimentsderangementdesmicrophones,descâbles,etc.
• Annulationdeseffetsparpédale
• CâbleetmicrophonePV*
• Supportpourlemixer*
* Cesymboleindiquedesoptionsdisponiblesàpart.Disponiblessurcertainsmodèles
Escort
®
3000
FRANÇAIS
L’installationdusystèmeEscort
®
ressembleàbeaucoupd’autresinstallationsdesystèmessonoresetfaitappelénormément
aubonsenssousdenombreuxaspects.Lasécuritédoitêtretoujoursvotrepremièrepréoccupation.Utiliseztoujoursdesprises
électriquesmisesàlaterreetdesprolongateursélectriquesàtroisconducteurs.Déployezlescâblesdusystèmesonoredefaçon
àéviterlesrisquesdechuteetposezdurubanadhésifsinécessaire.Placezlessupportsd’enceintesetdumixersurunesurface
planeetferme.Suivrecesconseilsvousaideraàéviterdesblessurespersonnellesoudesdommagesàl’équipementetde
garantirainsidesannéesdefonctionnementsansproblème.
PENSEZ D’ABORD À VOTRE SÉCURITÉ !
Guide d’installation
Installation des enceintes et du mixer
Disposez l’unité fermée de façon à ce que les enceintes soient dirigées vers vers le haut. Levez les dispositifs de blocage jusqu’à qu’ils soient
libres. Retirez les enceintes du boîtier.
REMARQUE:Lesverrouspeuventêtrerefermésunefoislesenceintesretirées.Celapermetdenepasvousencombrerlorsduretraitdes
autrescomposants.Vouséviterezainsid’endommagerlesverrous.Fermezlesverrousenappuyantdessusjusqu’àqu’ilss’encastrentsur
lescôtésduboîtier,ensuiteverrouillez-lesenplace.
Retirez les supports d’enceintes du boîtier. Assurez-vous que les pieds du support soient complétement déployés pour garantir une bonne
stabilité à la base des enceintes et qu’ils reposent sur une surface plane. Serrez la vis à oreilles sur la base de façon à ce qu’elle soit bien
serrée mais pas trop fort (Fig. 1). Réglez la hauteur du support d’enceinte à la hauteur désirée, serrez la vis à oreilles et insérez l’épingle de
sécurité comme indiqué (Fig. 2).
AVERTISSEMENT!Branchezexclusivementlesenceintesfournies
aveclemixer.LesenceintesdusystèmeEscortpossèdentune
chargeoptimaleadaptéeàlapuissancedumixeretl’utilisation
d’autresenceintespourraitengendrerdesdommagesà
l’équipement.
Placez les enceintes sur les socles et disposez-les face au public et loin des microphones (Fig. 3). Branchez les câbles pour haut-parleurs de la
prise située sur la face avant et au bas de l’enceinte aux sorties pour enceintes à l’arrière du mixer. Branchez l’enceinte de gauche à la SORTIE
DE GAUCHE et l’enceinte de droite à la SORTIE DE DROITE (Fig. 4).
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Insérez ici les prises pour enceintes
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
OU
Branchement de l’alimentation
AVERTISSEMENT!Avantderelieràl’alimentation,assurez-
vousqueleboutond’alimentationsoitsurlapositionOFF.
Branchement de sources de reproduction multimédia
L’amplificateur-mixer du système Escort accepte différentes sources de reproduction
multimédia. Pour brancher un lecteur de CD ou un tourne-disque mis à la terre, utilisez
les connexions de gauche et de droite RCA de la VOIE 7. Pour brancher, un lecteur MP3
ou un téléphone intelligent comme lecteur multimédia, utilisez le connecteur stéréo de
3,5 mm. Vous aurez besoin d’un câble stéréo de 3,5 mm (03007820) disponible auprès
de votre revendeur Peavey local. Quand vous utilisez une clé mémoire USB contenant
des fichiers MP3 ou d’autres fichiers audio, insérez la clé mémoire dans le connecteur
USB de la VOIE 7 et utilisez l’écran et les commandes de la section principale pour
naviguer et reproduire les fichiers audio (Fig. 7).
Branchez le cordon d’alimentation IEC à la prise sur le panneau arrière
de l’appareil comme indiqué (Fig. 8) et ensuite à une prise électrique
appropriée. Si un prolongateur électrique est nécessaire, assurez-vous qu’il
s’agit d’un cordon à trois conducteurs et que la broche de mise à la terre
soit intacte pour garantir une mise à la terre en toute sécurité.
NOTE: FOR UK ONLY
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond
with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
(1) The wire that is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal
that is marked by the letter E, or by the Earth symbol, or coloured green or green
and yellow. (2) The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that
is marked with the letter N, or the colour black. (3) The wire that is coloured brown
must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L, or the colour red.
Branchement des microphones ou des entrées de ligne
L’amplificateur-mixer du système Escort est conçu pour fonctionner avec des microphones à condensateur ou dynamiques, isolés et de bonne
qualité comme les microphones de la gamme Peavey PV
®
i. Branchez le microphone au connecteur d’entrée XLR (à trois broches) comme
indiqué (Fig. 5). Si vous utilisez plusieurs microphones, branchez-les dans leur ordre d’apparition sur scène afin de régler facilement chaque
microphone. Pour brancher un dispositif de niveau de ligne comme un clavier, utilisez un câble d’instrument de 6,5 mm et branchez-le dans le
connecteur central combiné XLR/6,5 mm comme indiqué (Fig. 6).
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
Insérez ici un dispositif à mémoire USB
Appuyez sur le bouton
pour activer le port USB
Utilisez les commandes pour explorer les
fichiers multimédia
Insérez ici le cordon d’alimentation
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Réglage des commandes et mise sous tension de l’appareil
Avant de mettre sous tension, vérifiez que tous les haut-parleurs, les microphones et
les autres dispositifs d’entrée soient branchés. Réglez les commandes de la section
principale sur la position de 12 heures et toutes les autres commandes entièrement
abaissées (tournées complétement à gauche). Mettez sous tension en plaçant le
commutateur ON/OFF situé sur l’arrière du mixer (Fig. 9) sur la position ON.
Réglage des commandes de gain et de volume
Le réglage optimal de l’amplificateur-mixer et des enceintes incluses sont marqués
sur la commande MASTER LEVEL (Fig. 10). Réglez la commande de NIVEAU DE VOIE
(Fig. 11) jusqu’à obtenir le volume souhaité. Si le volume souhaité est atteint avec
la commande de NIVEAU DE VOIE abaissée sur l’une des trois premières positions,
abaissez la commande MASTER LEVEL de façon à pouvoir augmenter le NIVEAU DE
VOIE. Si le volume souhaité est obtenu quand la commande de NIVEAU DE VOIE
est proche du maximum, alors augmentez la commande MASTER LEVEL de façon à
pouvoir abaisser le NIVEAU DE VOIE. Ces commandes sont identiques aux fonctions
d’un mixer de base.
Réglage des commandes de tonalité
Pour chaque voie active, réglez les commandes HIGH, MID-MORPH
®
, et LOW afin
d’obtenir le son voulu (Fig. 11). Effectuez ces réglages avec parcimonie car des
réglages trop élevés de l’une de ces commandes peuvent causer une distorsion du
son et accroître les possibilités de rétroaction sur les entrées de microphone.
HIGH
Cet égaliseur des hautes fréquences de type à correction en dégradé de
commande de tonalité active modifie les fréquences des aigus (de +/- 15 dB
à 12 kHz) et il est conçu pour supprimer le bruit ou ajouter de la clarté au
signal, en fonction de la qualité de la source.
MID-MORPH
Quand la plupart des commandes à moyennes fréquences travaillent à une
seule fréquence, l’égaliseur Mid-Morph fonctionne avec deux fréquences.
Quand la commande est tournée à gauche, elle réalise un filtrage à 250 Hz
pour réduire les fréquences qui rendent le son terne. Quand la commande
est tournée à droite, elle amplifie les fréquences à 4 kHz pour ajouter
de l’intelligibilité aux voix. De toute façon, l’amélioration de la voix et la
définition de l’instrument peuvent être obtenues.
LOW
C’est un égaliseur de type à correction en dégradé, qui peut modifier
les niveaux des basses fréquences (+/- 15 dB à 80 Hz). L’égaliseur des
fréquences basses ajoute de la profondeur aux signaux à faible sonorité
et nettoie les signaux ternes. Comme avec tout égaliseur, utilisez-le avec
parcimonie. Trop d’action sur cet égaliseur vous apportera une extrémité de
gamme basse assourdissante.
Placez le commutateur sur la position “ON”
Fonctionnement de base :
Les cercles vides indiquent la plage
de réglage optimale
Commandes de tonalité
Commande de niveau de voie
Fig. 10
Fig. 9
Fig. 11
Réglages des paramètres des effets
Le système Escort possède des effets numériques intégrés. Ces effets sont au choix
dans la section PRINCIPALE en tournant la commande de SÉLECTION D’EFFETS à
gauche ou à droite jusqu’à ce qu’il apparaisse sur l’écran (Fig. 12). Une fois l’effet
souhaité affiché sur l’écran, poussez la commande pour sélectionner et activer l’effet.
Pour régler un paramètre de l’effet, appuyez simplement le bouton de RÉGLAGE DE
PARAMÈTRE (Fig. 12), les paramètres disponibles et ses réglages apparaîtront sur
l’écran. Faites tourner la commande de SÉLECTION D’EFFETS à gauche ou à droite pour
régler le paramètre, ensuite appuyez sur le bouton de RÉGLAGE DE PARAMÈTRE ou sur
la commande de SÉLECTION D’EFFETS pour revenir à l’écran de sélection des effets.
Pour avoir plus ou moins l’effet, sur n’importe quelle voie, faites tourner la commande
d’EFFET DE VOIE à gauche pour entendre moins d’effet et à droite pour entendre plus
d’effet (Fig. 13). Le bouton de COUPURE D’EFFET de la section principale (Fig. 12) coupera
les effets sur toutes les voies. Aucun effet n’est disponible pour les voies multimédia.
Annulation des effets par pédale
Votre nouveau système Escort possède une fonction d’annulation des effets par pédale.
L’utilisateur est en mesure de couper les effets sur toutes les voies à l’aide d’une pédale
à simple bouton comme le Commutateur à simple bouton Momentary de chez Peavey
(03050680) qui est disponible à l’achat auprès de votre revendeur Peavey local. Insérez
le cordon de 6,5 mm de la pédale dans la prise d’ANNULATION D’EFFETS sur l’arrière du
mixer Escort (Fig. 14). Une fois branchée, un appui sur la pédale à simple bouton fera
basculer la commande de COUPURE D’EFFET (Fig. 12).
Effets et paramètres disponibles
Nom à l’écran Effet Paramètre Disponible
1 REV Plate Bri Réverbération claire plate Durée
2 REV Plate Br2 Réverbération douce plate passe-bas Durée
3 REV Plate Med Réverbération moyenne plate passe-bas Durée
4 REV Plate Dki Réverbération forte plate passe-bas Durée
5 REV Plate Dk2 Réverbération sombre plate Durée
6 REV Vocal Réverbération de hall pour voix Durée
7 REV Vocal Big Réverbération de hall pour voix fortes Durée
8 REV Vox Warm Réverbération de hall pour voix intenses Durée
9 REV Strings Réverbération de hall pour instruments à cordes Durée
10 REV Lg Brass Réverbération de hall pour instruments à vent Durée
11 REV Vox Air Réverbération de salle en plein air pour voix Durée
12 REV Vox Club Réverbération de salle de type boîte de nuit
pour voix
Durée
13 REV Snare Réverbération de salle pour petite caisse claire Durée
14 REV Ac Guitar Réverbération de salle pour guitare acoustique Durée
15 REV Sm Brass Réverbération de salle pour cuivres Durée
16 ENH Tube Distorsion à lampe pour améliorateur Intensité
17 ENH Vocal 1 Améliorateur de voix Vox Intensité
18 ENH Vocal 2 Améliorateur de voix Vox moyen Intensité
19 DLY Double Double retard Durée
20 DLY Slap Retard d'écho Durée
21 DLY BRT 1 Retard clair, quelques répétitions Durée
22 DLY BRT 2 Retard clair, plus de répétitions Durée
23 DLY BRT 3 Retard clair, nombreuses répétitions Durée
24 DLY Dark 1 Retard sombre, quelques répétitions Durée
25 DLY Dark 2 Retard sombre, plus de répétitions Durée
26 DLY Dark 3 Retard sombre, nombreuses répétitions Durée
27 CHO Deep Slow Chœur de grande profondeur, faible cadence Cadence
28 CHO Mod Wide Chœur de profondeur modérée, large cadence Cadence
29 CHO Shrt Wide Chœur de faible profondeur, large cadence Cadence
30 CHO Shrt Fast Chœur de faible profondeur, cadence rapide Cadence
31 CHO Deep Mod Chœur de grande profondeur, cadence modérée Cadence
Effets:
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Appuyez pour entrer en mode de réglage de
paramètre
Commande d’effets de voie
Insérez ici la prise de la pédale
(Commutateur à simple bouton Peavey Momentary
03050680)
Appuyez pour COUPER les effets sur toutes les voies
Tournez la commande pour faire défiler les effets,
appuyez sur le bouton pour choisir et activer l’effet
Reproduction de sources multimédia
Reliez votre source multimédia comme indiqué précédemment. Lors de l’utilisation
des prises RCA pour un lecteur CD, un tourne-disque ou un lecteur de cassette,
assurez-vous que le bouton est en position haute de façon qu’elles soient actives
(Fig. 15). Les entrées qui seront actives seront également affichées sur l’écran de la
section principale. Utilisez les commandes du dispositif source pour les fonctions
de lecture, d’arrêt, d’avance et de retour. Ajustez les commandes de la voie 7 sur le
mixer Escort pour obtenir le son souhaité. Pour reproduire des fichiers multimédia
issus de lecteur MP3, de SmartPhones ou autres appareils similaires, assurez-vous
que les boutons restent en position haute. Branchez le dispositif en utilisant un câble
de 3,5 mm indiqué précédemment et utilisez le dispositif source pour les commandes
de reproduction. Lorsqu’un dispositif est branché avec la prise de 3,5 mm, les prises
RCA sont automatiquement désactivées. Pour la reproduction de fichier audio ou MP3
à partir d’une clé mémoire USB, assurez-vous que le bouton est en position basse
(Fig. 16) de cette façon le port USB sera activé.
REMARQUE :LesystèmeEscortn’autorisepaslareproductionsimultanéede
plusieursentréesmultimédia.
Lorsque votre dispositif USB est branché, utilisez la commande de SÉLECTION
MULTIMÉDIA (Fig. 17) pour explorer vos fichiers audio. Une fois le fichier souhaité
affiché sur l’écran, appuyez la commande SÉLECTION MULTIMÉDIA pour ajouter le
fichier dans la liste. Utilisez les commandes du mixer pour les fonctions de lecture,
d’arrêt, d’avance et de retour. Si vous ignorez la navigation ou la sélection d’un fichier,
le système Escort reproduira les fichiers dans l’ordre de stockage de votre dispositif à
mémoire USB.
Leschiersnon-audioserontafchésdanslanavigation,maisaucunereproduction
sonoreneseraeffectuées’ilssontchoisis.Seulsleschiersaudiopeuventêtre
reproduits.
Types de fichier audio pris en charge
.WAV
.MP3
.WMA
MULTIMÉDIA :
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Fig. 15
Insérez ici les prises RCA du dispositif source
Insérez ici la prise stéréo de
3,5 mm du dispositif source
Appuyez sur le bouton jusqu’à sa position
“haute“ pour activer les prises RCA/3,5 mm
Insérez ici un dispositif à mémoire USB
Utilisez la commande pour explorer les fichiers
multimédia.
Appuyez sur la commande pour ajouter le fichier
à la liste de lecture
Utilisez les commandes
LECTURE, PAUSE, AVANCE et RETOUR
Appuyez sur le bouton pour activer le port USB
Utilisation de la section Graphic Equalizer
ContrairementauxcommandesLOWetHIGH,MID-MORPH,surchaquevoiequirèglent
latonalitépropredeleurssignauxd’entrée,l’égaliseurgraphiqueàseptbandes
règlel’équilibretonaldetouslessignauxarrivantàl’amplicateur-mixer.L’égaliseur
graphiqueestaussiunoutilpuissantquivousaideraàréduireouéliminerles
rétroactionsacoustiques.Unegrandesouplessederéglagedusonestdoncpossible,
maisutilisez-ledefaçonmodéréedanssesréglages.
Système de localisation de rétroactionFLS
®
LesindicateursàdiodeslumineusesdusystèmeFLS(Systèmedelocalisationde
rétroaction)sontdesoutilsprécieuxd’aideàlaréduction/éliminationdesrétroactions.
Larétroactionacoustiqueestlecrissementoulehurlementfortindésirablequi
s’entenddanslessystèmessonoresengendrésparlesondeshaut-parleurscapturé
parlesmicrophones.PourutiliserlafonctionFLS,réglezd’abordtouslesgradateurs
del’égaliseurgraphiqueà0(Fig.18).Ensuite,avantquelepublicarrive,augmentez
lacommandeMASTERLEVELet/ouleNIVEAUDEVOIEjusqu’àqu’unerétroactionse
produise.Observezlesvoyantslumineuxquis’allumentetbaissezlégèrementle
gradateurcorrespondant.Legainestainsiréduitauxfréquencesdelarétroaction
et,sinécessaire,cetteopérationpeutêtrereproduitepouraméliorerlegainavantla
rétroaction.Réglezuniquementlesgradateursà
defaiblesvaleurspouréviterdenuireà
laqualitésonore.
ÉGALISATION :
Éviter les rétroactions acoustiques
Encasderétroaction,ilestpréférabledemieuxplacerlesmicrophonesetleshaut-parleursdusystèmeavantd’envisagerdemodierles
réglagesdel’égalisation(EQ).Assurez-vousqueleshaut-parleurssoientdirigésdirectementverslepublicetloindesmicrophones.Placez
lesmicrophonesleplusprèsdelasourcesonoredemanièreraisonnable.Approcherlesmicrophonesauplusprèspermetd’augmenterle
volumedusonàtraverslesystèmesansavoirbesoind’ajouterdugain.
Conseils d’utilisation des microphones
Quandc’estpossible,préférezunseulmicrophone.Desmicrophonessupplémentairescapturentplusdesondeshaut-parleursetchaque
microphonedoitalorsêtreéteintpouréviterlesrétroactions.Cependant,sivousrencontrezdesdifcultésàéquilibrerleniveaudechaque
individuavecunseulmicroousivousneréussissezpasàobtenirungainsufsant,utiliserplusieursmicrophonesestunavantage.Par
exemple,attribueràplusieurschanteursleurspropresmicrophonespermetunedispositiondesmicrophonesplusprochedechaque
chanteur.Levolumedusondesmicrophonesestainsiplusélevéetceladépassedelointouteffetnéfastedel’utilisationdeplusieurs
microphones.Celapermetaussideréglerséparémentlevolumedechaquemicrophonepourobtenirunemeilleurebalance.
Rangement du système Escort
®
L’undesnombreuxavantagesdusystèmeEscortestquelesystèmesonoreaucompletpeutêtrerangéfacilementàl’intérieurdesonboîtier
detransport(Fig.19).Commencezparplierlessupportsd’enceintes,ensuitelesxezdansleurcompartimentderangementenutilisantles
deuxsangles.Placezlesmicrophonessupplémentairesdansleurcompartimentderangement,lescâblesdanslesautrescompartimentsou
aveclessupportsd’enceintes.Couchezlesenceintes,faceverslebas,ausommetdutiroirdufondetfermezlesquatreverrous.Lesystème
Escortestàprésentprêtpourletransportouàêtredéplacéavecsesrouesintégréesdestylevalisedevoyage.
Fig. 19
CONSEILS D’UTILISATION GÉNÉRALE :
Fig. 19
Fig. 18
Gradateurs de l’égaliseur à ZÉRO
OPTIONS :
AVERTISSEMENT :Pourdesraisonsdesécurité,veillezàouvrircomplètementlesupportdumixeretdeledisposer
surunesurfaceplaneetenéquilibre.
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Accessoires en option (disponible auprès de votre revendeur Peavey local)
Supportsdemicrophone-Supportsdemicroàtroispiedsavecperche(00722910)
Microphonesetcâblessupplémentaires-MicrophonePVi
®
2aveccâbleinclus(00496360)
Écrandemicrophone-écrannoir(00069100)
Câblesdehaut-parleursupplémentairesdedifférenteslongueurs-7,5mdecalibre16AWG(00060450)
Supportsd’enceintessupplémentairesdedifférentesdimensions-Supportd’enceintenoir(00722890)
CâblesaudiopourlecteurCD,tourne-disque,lecteuràcassetteoulecteurMP3/raccordementdetéléphoneintelligent
Ensembledesupportdemixersupplémentaire(00496340)
Retirezlesupportdumixerduboîtier.Lesupportdumixerestcomposédetroisparties:deuxpairesdepiedsetdetraversesdesupport
(Fig.20)Saisissezensemblelestraversesdesupportetlesraccordsdespiedscommeindiqué(Fig.21).Insérezcomplétementl’undes
ensemblesdepiedsdanslestraverses(Fig.22).Engardanttoujoursensemblelestraverses,posezlespiedssurlesoletinsérezlaseconde
pairedepieds.Sivousdevezbougerlesupport,déplacez-leenlepliantetensaisissantlespieds.
Fig. 20 Fig. 21 Fig. 22
Caractéristiques du système Escort
®
3000
Puissancedesortie: 80WattsRMS(parvoie)
Réponseenfréquence: De40Hzà20kHz+/-3dB
Protectioncontrelessurcharges: 10dBdelaplageDDT™quilimitelasortiedusystème
desonorisationand'éviterlasaturationquiseraiten
mesured'endommagerlesenceintes
Distorsion: Moinsde0,2%duTHDàpleinepuissance
RapportSignal/Bruit: Typiquement88dBenentréedemicro
Tensiond’alimentationsecteur: 115VAC60Hzou
230VAC50/60Hz
Poidsassemblé:
(supportscompris)
50livres.(22,67kg)
Dimensions: 14,5"Hx36,75"Lx15,5"P
(36,8cmx93,3cmx39,4cm)
Enceintes: Haut-parleurde254mm(10")
Pavillonacoustiquepiézoélectriqueduhaut-parleur
desaigus
Guide de dépannage du système Escort
®
3000
Problème Contrôle Correction
Aucunson
(ÉcranLCDéteint)
Est-cequelesystèmeaétémissoustension?
Est-cequelecordond’alimentationestbranchéàune
priseélectriquealimentée?
Branchezlecordond’alimentationàune
priseélectriquesoustensionetallumezle
système
Aucunson
(ÉcranLCDéteint)
Est-cequelescommandesdeGAINPRINCIPALetde
VOIEsonttournéesverslehaut?
RéglezàlafoislescommandesdeNIVEAU
DEVOIEetPRINCIPALauniveausouhaité.
Vériezlebranchementdesenceintes.Acti-
vezlesmicrophones.Vériezlaconnexion
delasourcesonoreetdesmicrophones.
Aucuneffet Est-cequelescommandesd’EFFETSdevoiesonttour-
néesverslehaut?
Est-cequelacommandedeCOUPURED’EFFETdela
sectionprincipaleestactivée?Est-cequ’uneffetest
activédanslemenu?
Assurez-vousquel’effetsouhaitéest
sélectionnédanslemenud’effetprincipal.
VériezlacommandedeCOUPURED’EFFET
principal.Silevoyantlumineuxestallumé,
lacommandedeCOUPURED’EFFETest
activée.Appuyezbrièvementleboutonde
COUPURED’EFFETpourdésactiver.Réglezla
commanded’EFFETSdevoiejusqu’àl’effet
sonoresoitentendu.
Leschiersdudispositifàmé-
moireUSBnesontpasreproduits
Est-cequelechierestprésent
danslalistedelec-
ture?
Est-cequeleformatdeschiersaudioestprisen
charge?
Assurez-vousqu’unefoislacommande
deSÉLECTIONMULTIMÉDIAtournéesurle
chiersouhaitéetafché,d’appuyersurla
commandepourajouterlechieràlaliste.
Vériezquevoschiersaudiosontdansle
bonformat.Consultezlalistedesformats
audioprisenchargeindiquéeprécédem-
mentdanscemanuel.
Hurlementoucrissementfortdes
enceintes
S'ilsdisparaissentlorsquelescommandesdeNIVEAU
PRINCIPALoudeVOIEsontabaissées,alorsils'agit
d'unerétroactionacoustique.
Réduisezlegaindemicrophone.Reposi-
tionnezlemicrophonederrièreouloindes
enceintes.ObservezlevoyantFLSau-des-
susdel'égaliseuretréduisezleniveaudu
gradateurcorrespondant.
Lesonestdéformé Est-cequeleGAINDEVOIEestrégléàunevaleurtrès
élevée?
RéduisezleGAINDEVOIEetaugmentezle
VOLUMEPRINCIPAL
Herzlichen Glückwunsch! Sie haben gerade das beste tragbare PA-System der Welt gekauft. Der integrierte Entwurf des Escort
ermöglicht einfachen Transport, während die benutzerfreundlichen Bedienungselemente einfache Bedienung bieten, wodurch der
Escort zur perfekten Wahl für Schulen, Kirchen, zivile Organisationen und auch für DJs und kleine Musikgruppen wird. Der Escort
hat doppelte Zweiweglautsprecher, angetrieben durch einen 7-Kanal-Powermixer, weshalb er sich ideal für vokale, musikalische
und DJ-Anwendungen eignet. Der Mixer hat einen Medienkanal mit mehrere Eingängen für mehrfache Wiedergabeoptionen,
sowie professionelle Qualitätseigenschaften wie einen Digitaleffektabschnitt, Effektunterdrückung durch Fußschalter und einen
grafischen Masterqualizer mit sieben Bändern und FLS
®
(Rückkopplungslokalisierungssystem). Der Tragekoffer bietet zusätzlichen
Platz für Mikrofone, Kabel und sonstiges erforderliches Zubehör. Der Escort-Koffer hat Schnappverschlüsse zur Anbringung von
Lautsprechern, mehrfache Handgriffe für verschiedene Trageoptionen und Räder für einfachen Transport. Bitte lesen Sie diese
Anleitung sorgfältig durch und genießen Sie Ihren Peavey Escort 3000.
Tragbares Pro-AUDIO-System
Eigenschaften:
• PraktischePackungmitTransporträdern
• Zweiweg-Lautsprechersystemmit10"WooferundpiezoelektrischemHorn
• 7-Kanal-Powermixer
• USB-MP3-Wiedergabe
• DigitaleffektehoherQualität
• 6xXLR-1/4"Kombinationseingänge
• Stereo-RCA-,3,5-mm-undUSB-MedieneingängefürMedienwiedergabe
• Grascher7-Band-EqualizermitFLS
• ZweifaltbareLautsprecherständer
• 2x15'Lautsprecherkabel
• SpeicherraumfürMikrofone,Kabelusw.
• EffekteperFußschalterdeaktivierbar
• PV-MikrofonundKabel*
• Mixerstand*
* zeigtOptionenan.AnbestimmtenModellenerhältlich
Escort
®
3000
DEUTSCH
Ein großer Teil des Setups für den Escort
®
ist ähnlich dem Setup für andere Tonanlagen, und viele Aspekte erfordern einfach
gesundenMenschenverstand.SicherheitsollteimmeranersterStellestehen.VerwendenSieimmerSchukosteckdosenund
dreiadrigeVerlängerungskabel.VerlegenSiedieKabelderTonanlageso,dassStolpergefahrvermiedenwird,undxierenSiedie
Kabel erforderlichenfalls durch Klebestreifen. Stellen Sie die Lautsprecherständer und den Mixer auf eine solide, ebene Oberfläche.
Befolgen dieser Richtlinien hilft Ihnen, Körperverletzungen und Ausrüstungsbeschädigung zu vermeiden, und versichert jahrelange
VerwendungohneStörungen.
SICHERHEIT ÜBER ALLES!
Setup-Leitfaden
Aufstellung von Mixer und Lautsprechern
Stellen Sie das Gerät so auf, dass die Lautsprecher nach oben zeigen. Lösen Sie die Schnappverschlüsse, indem Sie sie anheben, bis sie
entriegeln. Entfernen Sie die Lautsprecher vom Koffer.
Hinweis: Die Schnappverschlüsse können nach Entfernen der Lautsprecher geschlossen werden. Dies wird empfohlen, um Interferenz mit
Entfernen der anderen Komponenten zu vermeiden. Dies hilft auch, Beschädigen der Schnappverschlüsse zu vermeiden. Schließen Sie den
Schnappverschluss, indem Sie ihn nach innen drücken, bis er eben mit der Seite des Koffers ist, und drücken Sie ihn dann nach unten, bis
er einrastet.
Entfernen Sie die Lautsprecherständer aus dem Koffer. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Füße des Ständers voll ausgezogen sind, um eine
stabile Basis für die Lautsprecher zu bieten, und dass sie auf einer ebenen Oberfläche stehen. Ziehen Sie die Rändelschraube an der Basis
fest,abernichtzufestan(Abb.1).HebenSiedieLautsprecherständerzurgewünschtenHöhean,ziehenSiedieRändelschraubefest,und
bringenSiedenSicherheitsstiftwiegezeigtan(Abb.2).
WARNUNG!NurdiemitgeliefertenLautsprecherandenMixer
anschließen. Escort-Lautsprecher bieten optimale Last für den
Powermixer,unddieVerwendungandererLautsprecherkannzu
Beschädigung der Ausrüstung führen.
Stellen Sie die Lautsprecher auf die Ständer und positionieren Sie sie so, dass sie auf das Publikum gerichtet sind und weg von den Mikrofonen
(Abb.3).SchließenSiedieLautsprecherkabelvondenBuchsenanderunterenVorderseitederLautsprecherandieLautsprecherausgänge
an der Rückseite des Mixers an. Schließen Sie den linken Lautsprecher an den linken Ausgang und den rechten Lautsprecher an den rechten
Ausgangan(Abb.4).
Abb. 3
Abb. 4
Abb. 1
Abb. 2
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
oder
Die Lautsprecherstecker hier
anschließen.
Netzanschluss
WARNUNG!AchtenSiebeimAnschlussandasNetzdarauf,
dasssichderNetzschalterinderAUS-Positionbendet.
Anschließen von Medienwiedergabequellen
DerEscort-PowermixerakzeptiertverschiedeneMedienwiedergabegeräte.Verwenden
SiezumAnschließeneinesCD-PlayersodereinesgeerdetenPlattenspielersden
rechtenunddenlinkenAnschlussvonCHANNEL7RCA.VerwendenSiezumAnschluss
einesMP3-PlayersodereinesSmartphonesmitMedienwiedergabeden3,5-mm-
Stereoanschluss.Dieserfordertein3,5-mm-Stereokabel(03007820),dasSiebei
IhremPeavey-Händlererhaltenkönnen.WennSieeinenUSB-Memorystickmitdarauf
gespeicherten MP3- oder anderen Audiodateien verwenden, so schließen Sie den
MemorystickandenUSB-PortanCHANNEL7anundverwendenSiedenBildschirmund
die Bedienungselemente am Masterabschnitt, um zu den Audiodateien zu navigieren
und sie wiederzugeben (Abb. 7).
Schließen Sie das IEC-Netzkabel wie gezeigt (Abb. 8) an die Steckdose an
der Rückseite des Geräts und dann an eine geeignete Steckdose an. Wenn
ein Verlängerungskabel erforderlich ist, so stellen Sie sicher, dass es ein
dreiadriges Kabel mit intakter Erdklemme ist, um die Sicherheitserdung zu
bewahren.
NOTE: FOR UK ONLY
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond
with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
(1)Thewirethatiscolouredgreenandyellowmustbeconnectedtotheterminal
that is marked by the letter E, or by the Earth symbol, or coloured green or green
andyellow.(2)Thewirethatiscolouredbluemustbeconnectedtotheterminalthat
is marked with the letter N, or the colour black. (3) The wire that is coloured brown
must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L, or the colour red.
Anschließen von Mikrofon(en) oder Leitungseingängen
Der Escort-Powermixer ist entworfen, um mit allen symmetrischen, dynamischen oder Kondensatormikrofonen guter Qualität zu arbeiten, z. B.
diePV
®
i-SerievonPeavey-Mikrofonen.SchließenSiedasMikrofonwiegezeigtandenXLR-Eingangsanschluss(3Stifte)an(Abb.5).WennSie
mehrere Mikrofone verwenden, so schließen Sie diese für einfache Einstellung jedes Mikrofons in der Reihenfolge an, in der Sie auf der Bühne
verwendetwerden.VerwendenSiezumAnschlusseinesLeitungsgerätswieeinesKeyboardein1/4"-InstrumentkabelPV
®
i und schließen Sie
dasKabelwiegezeigtinderMittedesXLR-Eingangsanschluss1/4"-Combo-Anschlussesan(Abb.6).
Abb. 6
Abb. 5
SteckenSiedenUSB-Speicherhierein.
VerwendenSiedenKnopf,umdurchdie
Mediendateien zu blättern.
Das Netzkabel hier anschließen.
Abb. 7
Abb. 8
Drücken Sie den Knopf „ein“,
umUSBzuaktivieren.
Einstellung der Bedienungselemente und Einschalten des Geräts
Stellen Sie vor dem Einschalten sicher, dass alle Lautsprecher, Mikrofone und
andere Eingangsgeräte angeschlossen sind. Stellen Sie die Bedienungselemente des
Masterabschnittsaufdie12-Uhr-StellungundalleanderenBedienungselementeauf
die niedrigste Stellung (ganz nach links gedreht). Schalten Sie das Gerät ein, indem
SiedenSchalterON/OFFaufderRückseitedesMixersaufONstellen(Abb.9).
Einstellung von Verstärkung und Lautstärke
Die optimale Einstellung für den Powermixer und die mitgelieferten Lautsprecher
istamBedienungselementMASTERLEVELmarkiert(Abb.10).StellenSiedas
BedienungselementfürdenKanalpegel(LVL)(Abb.11)soein,dassdiegewünschte
Lautstärkeerreichtwird.WenndiegewünschteLautstärkeerreichtwird,währendLVL
aufeinedererstendreiPositionengestelltist,sostellenSieMASTERLEVELniedriger
ein,damitLVLerhöhtwerdenkann.WenndiegewünschteLautstärkeerreichtwird,
währendLVLnahedemMaximumist,sostellenSieMASTERLEVELhöherein,damit
LVLverringertwerdenkann.DiessinddieselbenGrundfunktionenwiefürjeden
Mischer.
Einstellung der Tonregler
Stellen Sie für jeden aktiven Kanal die Bedienungselemente HIGH, MID-MORPH
®
undLOWein,umdengewünschtenKlangzuerhalten(Abb.11).LassenSie
bei diesen Einstellungen Mäßigung walten, da extrem hohe Einstellungen
dieserBedienungselementeVerzerrungdesKlangsverursachenkannunddie
Wahrscheinlichkeit von Rückkopplungsfähig erhöht.
HIGH
Dieser aktive Stufen-Klangregler High EQ wirkt bei hohen Frequenzen
(+/-15dBbei12kHz)undistdafürausgelegt,Rauschenzubeseitigenoder
dem Signal Brillianz hinzuzufügen, je nach Qualität der Quelle.
MID-MORPH
Während die meisten Regler für den mittleren Bereich auf nur einer
Frequenz arbeiten, arbeitet Mid-Morph auf zwei Frequenzen. Wenn er
gegendenUhrzeigersinngedrehtwird,setzterbei250Hzeinundsenkt
den Pegel bei Frequenzen ab, die den Klang unsauber machen. Wenn
erimUhrzeigersinngedrehtwird,verstärkterbei4kHz,umdiedie
Sprachverständlichkeit zu verbessern. In beiden Fällen wird eine verbesserte
Sprach-oderInstrumentendenitionerreicht.
LOW
EinStufen-Equalizer,derbeiBassfrequenzenwirkt(+/-15dBbei80Hz).
Low EQ fügt dünn-klingenden Signalen Tiefe hinzu oder verschönert dumpfe
Signale. Wie jeden EQ, bitte sparsam verwenden. Zu viel von diesem EQ
kann zu Brummen führen.
Grundbetrieb:
Leere Kreise zeigen den optimalen Bereich an
Tonregler
Kanalpegelregler
Abb. 10
Abb. 9
Abb. 11
Schalten Sie den Schalter nach rechts zu „ON“
Anpassen der Effekteinstellungen
Der Escort hat eingebaute Digitaleffekte. Diese Effekte können im Masterabschnitt durch
DrehendesKnopfesEFFECTSSELECTnachrechtsoderlinksgewähltwerden,bisder
gewünschteEffektaufdemDisplayangezeigtwird(Abb.12).DrückenSiedenKnopfein,
um den Effekt zu aktivieren, sobald der gewünschte Effekt angezeigt wird. Drücken Sie
zumEinstellendeEffektparametereinfachdieTastePARAMETERADJUST(Abb.12).Die
zurVerfügungstehendenParameterundihreEinstellungenwerdenangezeigt.Drehen
SiedenKnopfEFFECTSSELECTnachlinksoderrechts,umdenParameteranzupassen,
unddrückenSiedanndieTastePARAMETERADJUSToderdieTasteEFFECTSSELECT,um
zumWahlbildschirmfürdieEffektezurückzukehren.UmeinenEffektodereinenKanal
stärkeroderschwächerzuhören,drehenSiedenKnopfCHANNELEFXnachlinks,um
denEffektzuschwächenodernachrechts,umihnzuverstärken(Abb.13).DieTasteEFX
MUTEamMasterabschnitt(Abb.12)schaltetdieEffekteanallenKanälenstumm.Anden
Medienkanälen gibt es keine Effekte.
Effekte per Fußschalter deaktivieren
Ihr neuer Escort kann Effekte per Fußschalter deaktivieren. Dies macht es dem Benutzer
möglich, die Effekte an allen Kanälen mit einem einzigen Fußschalter stummzuschalten,
z.B.mitdemPeaveyMomentarySingle-ButtonSwitch(03050680),derbeiIhrem
Peavey-Händlererhältlichist.SchließenSieden1/4"-SteckerdesFußschaltersandie
BuchseFOOTSWITCHEFXDEFEATaufderRückseitedesEscort-Mixersan(Abb.14).Nach
demAnschlusswirdEFXMUTEdurchDrückendesFußschaltersumgeschaltet(Abb.12).
Verfügbare Effekte und Parameter
Name auf Effekt Verfügbarer Parameter
1 REV Plate Br1 Plate Reverb hell Zeit
2 REV Plate Br2 Plate Reverb milder Tiefpass Zeit
3 REV Plate Med Plate Reverb mittlerer Tiefpass Zeit
4 REV Plate Dk1 Plate Reverb harter Tiefpass Zeit
5 REV Plate Dk2 Plate Reverb dunkel Zeit
6 REV Vocal Hall Reverb vokal Zeit
7 REV Vocal Big Hall Reverb vokal groß Zeit
8 REV Vox Warm Hall Reverb vokal glühen Zeit
9 REV Strings Hall Reverb Streichinstrumente Zeit
10 REV Lg Brass Hall Reverb Blechbläser Hall Zeit
11 REV Vox Air Raum Reverb vokal Luft Zeit
12 REV Vox Club Raum Reverb vokal Klub Zeit
13 REV Snare Raum Reverb Snare niedrig Zeit
14 REV Ac Guitar Raum Reverb akustische Gitarre Zeit
15 REV Sm Brass Raum Reverb Blechbläser Zeit
16 ENH Tube Enhancer-Röhrenverzerrung Helligkeit
17 ENH Vocal 1 Vokal-Enhancer Vox Helligkeit
18 ENH Vocal 2 Vokal-Enhancer Vox mittel Helligkeit
19 DLY Double Doppelte Verzögerung Zeit
20 DLY Slap Verzögerung Slapback Zeit
21 DLY BRT 1 Verzögerung hell, wenig Wiederholungen Zeit
22 DLY BRT 2 Verzögerung hell, mehr Wiederholungen Zeit
23 DLY BRT 3 Hell, meist Wiederholungen Zeit
24 DLY Dark 1 Dunkel, wenig Wiederholungen Zeit
25 DLY Dark 2 Verzögerung dunkel, mehr Wiederholungen Zeit
26 DLY Dark 3 Verzögerung dunkel, meiste Wiederholungen Zeit
27 CHO Deep Slow Chor große Tiefe, geringe Rate Rate
28 CHO Mod Wide Chor mäßige Tiefe, breite Rate Rate
29 CHO Shrt Wide Chor kurze Tiefe, breite Rate Rate
30 CHO Shrt Fast Chor kurze Tiefe, schnelle Rate Rate
31 CHO Deep Mod Chor große Tiefe, mäßige Rate Rate
Effekte:
Abb. 12
Abb. 13
Abb. 14
Drücken für Stummschalten der Effekte auf
allen Kanälen.
Kanaleffektregler
Fußschalterstecker hier anschließen
(PeaveyEinzelknopf-Taster03050680)
Drücken für Stummschalten der Effekte auf allen
Kanälen.
DrehenSiedenKnopf,umdenEffektzunden,und
drücken Sie den Knopf „ein“, um den Effekt zu wählen
und zu aktivieren.
Wiedergabe von Medienquelle
SchließenSieIhrMedienquellgerätwieobenangeführtan.StellenSiebeiVerwendung
vonRCA-SteckernfüreinenCD-Player,einenPlattenspielerodereinTonbandgerät
sicher,dassderKnopfheraussteht,damitdieseBuchsenaktivsind(Abb.15).Aktive
EingängewerdenauchaufdemDisplayamMasterabschnittangezeigt.Verwenden
Sie die Bedienungselemente am Quellgerät für die Funktionen Wiedergabe, Stopp,
VorwärtsundZurück.StellenSiedieBedienungselementefürKanal7amEscort-Mixer
für den gewünschten Klang ein. Stellen Sie für Medienwiedergabe mit einem MP3-
Player einem Smartphone oder einem ähnlichen Gerät sicher, dass der Knopf gezogen
bleibt.VerwendenSieein3,5-mm-Stereokabelwieobenangeführt,undverwenden
SiedasQuellgerätfürWiedergaberegelung.WenneinGerätandie3,5-mm-Buchse
angeschlossenist,werdendieRCA-Buchsenautomatischdeaktiviert.StellenSiefür
WiedergabevonMP3-oderAudiodateienvoneinemUSB-Memorysticksicher,dassder
Knopfeingeschobenist(Abb.16),damitderUSB-Portaktiviertist.
HINWeIS: Der Escort erlaubt nicht gleichzeitige Wiedergabe mehrerer
Medieneingänge.
VerwendenSiebeiangebrachtemUSB-GerätdenKnopfMEDIASELECT(Abb.17),um
durchIhreAudiodateienzunavigieren.DrückenSiedenKnopfMEDIASELECT,sobald
diegewünschteDateiangezeigtwird,umdieDateizuwählen.VerwendenSiedie
BedienungselementeamMixerfürWiedergabe,Pause,VorwärtsundZurück.WennSie
nicht navigieren oder eine bestimmte Datei wählen, spielt der Escort die Dateien in der
Reihenfolge,indersieaufIhremUSB-Memorystickgespeichertsind.
Andere als Audiodateien werden in der Navigation angezeigt, bewirken bei Wahl
jedoch keine Audiowiedergabe. Es können nur Audiodateien für Wiedergabe gewählt
werden.
Unterstützte Audiodateitypen
.WAV
.MP3
.WMA
Medien:
Abb. 16
Abb. 17
Abb. 15
SchließenSiedenRCA-SteckervomQuellgeräthieran.
SchließenSieden3,5-mm-
Stecker vom Quellgerät hier an.
Drücken Sie den Knopf, bis er „hervorsteht“,
umdieRCA-/3,5-mm-Buchsenzuaktivieren.
SteckenSiedenUSB-Speicherhierein.
VerwendenSiedenKnopf,umdurchdie
Mediendateien zu blättern.
Drücken Sie den Knopf „ein“, um eine Datei für
Wiedergabe zu wählen.
Verwendensiedie
Bedienungselemente für Wiedergabe, Pause,
VorwärtsundZurück.
DrückenSiedenKnopf„ein“,umUSBzu
aktivieren.
Verwendung des Graphic Equalizer
Im Gegensatz zu den Bedienungselementen HIGH, MID-MORPH, und LOW für jeden
Kanal,dienurdenKlangfürdieeigenenEingangssignaleanpassen,stelltdergrasche
7-Band-Entzerrer die Klangbalance für alle durch den Powermixer gehenden Signale
ein.DiesergrascheEntzerreristaucheinwirkungsvollesMittel,umakustische
Rückkopplung zu verringern oder zu beseitigen. Dies bietet dem Benutzer große
FlexibilitätbeiderAnpassungdesKlangs,aberbeiderVerwendungsollteMäßigung
walten gelassen werden.
FLS
®
Feedback Locating System
Die LED-Anzeigen des FLS (Rückkopplungslokalisierungssystem) sind ein wertvolles
MittelzurVerringerung/BeseitigungvonRückkopplung.AkustischeRückkopplungist
das heulende oder quietschende Geräusche von einem Lautsprechersystem als Ergebnis
derAufnahmedesLautsprechertonsdurchdasMikrofon.StellenSiezurVerwendungdes
FLS-SystemszuerstalleSchiebereglerdesgraschenEntzerrers(Abb.18)auf0.Erhöhen
SiedannvorderAnkunftdesPublikumsMASTERLEVELund/oderCHANNELLEVEL,bis
es zu Rückkopplung kommt. Merken Sie sich, welche LED aufleuchtet, und verringern
SiedanndenentsprechendenSchieberegleretwas.DiesverringertdieVerstärkung
der Rückkopplungsfrequenz und kann erforderlichenfalls wiederholt werden, um die
VerstärkungvorRückkopplungzuverbessern.VerstellenSiedieSchiebereglernur
etwas, um die Klangqualität nicht zu beeinträchtigen.
Entzerrung:
Vermeiden von akustischer Rückkopplung
Wenn es zu Rückkopplung kommt, ist es immer am besten, einen Blick auf die Aufstellung der Mikrofone und Lautsprecher des Systems zu
werfen, bevor mit Einstellung des Entzerrers begonnen wird. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Lautsprecher so aufgestellt sind, dass sie den Ton
zum Publikum und weg von den Mikrofonen leiten. Stellen Sie die Mikrofone so nahe wie angemessen an der Tonquelle auf. Annäherung der
MikrofoneerhöhtdieLautstärkedurchdasSystem,ohnedassdieVerstärkungerhöhtwerdenmuss.
Richtlinien für die Mikrofonverwendung
Wenn es praktisch möglich ist, sollte nur ein Mikrofon verwendet werden. Zusätzliche Mikrofone erfassen mehr Ton von den Lautsprechern,
und jedes Mikrofon muss dann niedriger eingestellt werden, um Rückkopplung zu verhüten. Wenn es jedoch schwierig ist, die Pegel
verschiedenerIndividuenmitnureinemMikrofonabzugleichen,oderwennSieimmernochnichtausreichendeVerstärkungerhaltenkönnen,
kanndieVerwendungmehrererMikrofonevorteilhaftsein.WennzumBeispielmehrereSängerjeweilseineigenesMikrofonerhalten,können
die Mikrofone näher an jeden Sänger gebracht werden. Dies erhöht das Tonvolumen am Mikrofon und überwiegt nachteilige Effekte durch
dieVerwendungmehrererMikrofonebeiweitem.WeiterhinermöglichtesdieindividuelleEinstellungderLautstärkejedesMikrofonsfür
angemessene Balance.
Einpacken des Escort
®
Einer der Hauptvorteile des Escorts besteht darin, dass das gesamte Beschallungssystem in einem leicht transportablen Koffer verpackt
werdenkann(Abb.19).FaltenSiezuerstdieLautsprecherständerzusammen,undsichernSiediesedannmitdenbeidenBänderninihrem
Transportfach. Legen Sie optionale Mikrofone in ihr Transporfach, und verstauen Sie die Kabel in einem anderen Fach oder zusammen mit
denLautsprecherständern.LegenSiedieLautsprechermitderVorderseitenachuntenaufdieuntereSchaleundsichernSiesiemitdenvier
Schnappverschlüssen. Der Escort kann nun getragen oder auf seinen eingebauten Rollen transportiert werden.
Abb. 19
Allgemeine Hinweise für die Verwendung:
Abb. 19
Abb. 18
Entzerrer-Schieberegler auf Null
Optionen:
WARNUNG: Öffnen Sie den Mixerstand zur Sicherheit immer ganz und stellen Sie ihn auf eines stabile, ebene Oberfläche.
Abb. 20
Abb. 21
Abb. 22
Optionales Zubehör (bei Ihrem Peavey-Händler erhältlich)
Mikrofonständer-Dreibein-MikrofonständermitAusleger(00722910)
ZusätzlicheMikrofoneundKabel-PVi
®
2-Kabelinbegriffen(00496360)
Mikrofonwindschutz-schwarzerWindschutz(00069100)
ZusätzlicheLautsprecherkabelinverschiedenenLängen-25'16AWG(00060450)
ZusätzlicheLautsprecherständerinverschiedenenGrößen-schwarzerLautsprecherständer(00722890)
AudiokabelfürCD-Player,Plattenspieler,TonbandgerätoderMP3-Plazer/Smartphone-Anschluss
OptionaleMixerstandmontage(00496340)
EntfernenSiedenMixerstandvomKoffer.DerMixerstandbestehtausdreiTeilen:zweiPaarBeineunddieStandquerstreben(Abb.20).
HaltenSiedieStandquerstrebenmitdenBeinbuchsenwiegezeigtzusammen(Abb.21).SchiebenSieeinenSatzBeineindieQuerstrebenein
(Abb.22).HaltenSiedieQuerstrebenweiterhinzusammen,stellenSiedieBeineaufdenBoden,undschiebenSiedaszweitePaarBeineein.
Wenn Sie den Stand transportieren müssen, so halten Sie ihn zusammengefaltet an den Beinen.
Abb. 20 Abb. 21 Abb. 22
Technische Daten des Escort
®
3000:
Ausgangsleistung: 80Watteffektiv(proKanal)
Frequenzgang: 40Hzbis20kHz+/-3dB
Überlastungsschutz: 10dBvonDDT™zurBegrenzungdesPA-Ausgangszur
VerhütungvonÜbersteuerungsbegrenzungsschäden
Verzerrung: Wenigerals0,2%THDbeimaximalerLeistung
Rauschabstand: Typisch88dBMikrofoneingang
Netzversorgung: 115V,60HzWechselstromoder
230V,50/60HzWechselstrom
Gewicht, zusammengebaut:
(Stand eingeschlossen)
(50lbs.)22,67kg
Abmessungen: (14,5"Hx36,75"Bx15,5"T)
36,8cmx93,3cmx39,4cm
Lautsprecher: Woofer254mm(10")
Piezoelektrischer Hornhochtöner
Störungssuche für den Escort
®
3000
Problem Überprüfung Korrektur
Kein Ton
(LCDleuchtetnicht)
Ist der Hauptschalter eingeschaltet?
Ist das Netzkabel an eine Steckdose angeschlossen?
Schalten Sie den Hauptschalter ein. Schließen Sie
das Netzkabel an eine Steckdose an.
Kein Ton
(LCDleuchtetnicht)
SinddieBedienungselementeMASTERundCHAN-
NEL GAIN aufgedreht?
Stellen Sie die Bedienungselemente für MASTER
undCHANNELLEVELaufdengewünschtenPegel
ein. Überprüfen Sie die Lautsprecheranschlüsse.
Schalten Sie den Mikrofonschalter ein. Überprü-
fen Sie den Anschluss des Mikrofons bzw. der
Tonquelle.
Keine Effekte Sind die Bedienungselemente für Kanaleffekte
aufgedreht?IstdieHaupt-EFX-Stummschaltung
aktiviert? Ist ein Effekt im Menü aktiviert?
Stellen Sie sicher, dass der gewünschte Effekt im
Haupteffektmenüaktiviertist.IstdieHaupt-EFX-
Stummschaltung aktiviert? Wenn die LED leuchtet,
istdieEFX-Stummschaltungaktiviert.Drücken
SiedieTasteEFXMUTEeinmalzumDeaktivieren.
Stellen Sie das Bedienungselement für Kanalef-
fekte ein, bis der Audioeffekt gehört wird.
DateienaufeinemUSB-
Speichergerät werden nicht
wiedergegeben
Ist die Datei für Wiedergabe gewählt?
Haben die Audiodateien das richtige Format?
StellenSiesicher,dassderKnopfMEDIASELECT
zur gewünschten Datei gedreht und dann gedrückt
worden ist, um die Datei zu wählen. Stellen
Sie sicher, dass die Audiodateien das korrekte
Format haben. Beziehen Sie sich auf die Liste der
unterstützen Audioformate weiter oben in diesem
Handbuch.
Lautes Heulen oder Quietschen
von den Lautsprechern
Wenn dies bei Herunterdrehen der Bedienungsele-
menteCHANNELoderMASTERLEVELverschwindet,
handelt es sich um akustische Rückkopplung.
VerringernSiedieMikrofonverstärkung.Positio-
nieren Sie das Mikrofon weiter nach hinten oder
weg von den Lautsprechern. Sehen Sie auf die
FLS-Leuchte über dem Entzerrer und verringern
Sie den Pegel des entsprechenden Schiebereg-
lers.
VerzerrterTon Ist die Kanalverstärkung sehr hoch eingestellt? VerringernSieCHANNELGAINunderhöhenSie
MASTERVOLUME.
Sistema audio portatile professionale
Caratteristiche:
• Comodacustodiaconrotellestilevaligia
• Sistemaaltoparlanteaduevieconwooferda10"etrombapiezoelettrica
• Mixeralimentatoa7canali
• RiproduzioneMP3USB
• Effettidigitaliadaltaqualità
• 6xingressicombinazioneXLR-1/4"
• IngressistereoRCA,3,5mmemultimedialeUSBperriproduzionemultimediale
• EQgracoasettebandeconFLS
• Duesupportialtoparlantepieghevoli
• 2xcavialtoparlanteda15'
• Scompartidiconservazionepermicrofoni,caviecc.
• Eliminazioneeffetticoninterruttoreapedale
• Cavo*emicrofonoPV
• Supportomixer*
* Indicafunzionalitàopzionali.Disponibilisualcunimodelli
Escort
®
3000
ITALIANO
Granpartedellacongurazionedell’Escort
®
èsimileallacongurazionedeglialtrisistemisonori,emoltialtriaspettirichiedono
normalesensocomune.Lasicurezzadeveesseresemprealprimoposto.Utilizzaresemprepreseconmessaaterraeprolunghe
tripolari.Disporreicavidelsistemaaudioinmododaprevenireilpericolodiinciampareessarlisottosenecessario.Posizionare
isupportidell’altoparlanteeilmixersuunasuperciepianaestabile.Osservandoquestelineeguidaaiuteràaprevenireinfortuni
personaliedannialleapparecchiature,assicurandoannidifunzionamentosenzaproblemi.
SICUREZZA PRIMA DI TUTTO!
Guida configurazione
Configurazione mixer e altoparlanti
Posizionare l’unità chiusa in modo che gli altoparlanti siano rivolti verso l’alto. Rilasciare i blocchi sollevandoli finché non si sganciano.
Rimuovere gli altoparlanti dall’alloggiamento.
NOTA:Iblocchipossonoesserechiusidopocheglialtoparlantisonostatirimossi.Siraccomandadievitareinterferenzaconlarimozione
dialtricomponenti.Ciòaiuteràancheaevitareildanneggiamentodeiblocchi.Chiudereilbloccopremendolonchénontoccaillato
dell’alloggiamento,quindispingereversoilbassonchénonsiblocca.
Rimuovere i supporti dell’altoparlante dall’alloggiamento. Assicurarsi che le gambe sul supporto siano completamente estese per fornire
una base stabile per gli altoparlanti e siano posizionate su una superficie piana. Stringere la vite a testa zigrinata sulla base in modo che si
nascosta, ma non stringere oltre il necessario (Fig. 1). Sollevare i supporti dell’altoparlante all’altezza desiderata, stringere la vite a testa
zigrinata e installare il perno di sicurezza come mostrato (Fig. 2).
ATTENZIONE!Collegaresologlialtoparlantiinclusialmixer.Gli
altoparlantiEscortfornisconouncaricoottimaleperilmixer
alimentatoel’utilizzodialtrialtoparlantipuòcomportareil
danneggiamentodell’apparecchiatura.
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
O
Inserire i jack dell’altoparlante
qui
Collegamento alimentazione
ATTENZIONE!Primadicollegarel’alimentazioneassicurarsi
chel’interruttoresiainposizioneOFF.
Collegamento fonti riproduzione multimediale
Il mixer alimentato Escort accetterà vari dispositivi di riproduzione multimediale. Per
collegare un lettore CD o registratore con collegamento a terra, utilizzare le connessioni
sinistra e destra CHAN NEL 7 RCA. Per collegare un lettore MP3 o smartphone con
riprodizione multimediale, utilizzare il connettore stereo da 3,5 mm. Ciò richiederà un
cavo stereo da 3,5 mm (03007820) che può essere trovato presso un rivenditore Peavey
locale. Quando si usa una memory stick USB con file MP3 o altri file audio salvati su di
essa, inserire la memory stick nel connettore USB sul CHANNEL 7 e utilizzare lo schermo
e i controlli nella sezione master per navigare e riprodurre i file audio (Fig. 7).
Collegare il cavo di alimentazione IEC alla presa sul pannello posteriore
dell’unità come mostrato (Fig. 8), e poi a una presa elettrica idonea. Se
è necessaria una prolunga, assicurarsi che sia un cavo a tre fili con un
terminale di terra intatto per preservare il collegamento di terra.
NOTE: FOR UK ONLY
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond
with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
(1) The wire that is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal
that is marked by the letter E, or by the Earth symbol, or coloured green or green
and yellow. (2) The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that
is marked with the letter N, or the colour black. (3) The wire that is coloured brown
must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L, or the colour red.
Collegamento microfono(i) o ingresso(i) linea
Il mixer alimentato di Escort è concepito per lavorare con qualsiasi microfono con condensatore di buona qualità, bilanciato, dinamico come
la serie di microfoni PV
®
i di Peavey. Collegare il microfono al connettore di ingresso XLR (tre pin) come mostrato (Fig. 5). Se si utilizzano più
microfoni, collegarli nell’ordine in cui saranno sul palco per la semplice regolazione di ciascun microfono. Per collegare un dispositivo di livello
di linea come una tastiera, usare un cavo strumento da 1/4" e inserirlo al centro del connettore combo XLR-1/4" come mostrato (Fig. 6).
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
Inserire il dispositivo di memoria USB qui
Utilizzare la manopola per scorrere tra i file
multimediali
Inserire il cavo di alimentazione qui
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Premere il pulsante “in” per
attivare l’USB
Impostazione controlli e accensione dell’unità
Prima di accendere, assicurarsi che tutti gli altoparlanti, i microfoni e gli altri
dispositivi di ingresso siano collegati. Impostare i controlli della sezione Master a
ore 12 e tutti gli altri controlli verso il basso, (ruotare completamente verso sinistra).
Accendere portando l’interruttore ON/OFF sul retro del mixer (Fig. 9) sulla posizione
ON.
Regolazione guadagno e controlli volume
L’impostazione ottimale per il mixer alimentato e gli altoparlanti inclusi è
contrassegnata sul controllo MASTER LEVEL (Fig. 10). Regolare il controllo CHANNEL
LEVEL (Fig. 11) fino al raggiungimento del volume desiderato. Se il volume desiderato
è raggiunto con CHANNEL LEVEL verso il basso su una delle prime tre posizioni,
ruotare verso il basso MASTER LEVEL in modo da poter ruotare CHANNEL LEVEL
verso l’alto. Se il volume desiderato è raggiunto quando CHANNEL LEVEL è vicino al
massimo, aumentare MASTER LEVEL in modo da poter abbassare CHANNEL LEVEL.
Queste sono le stesse funzioni di qualsiasi mixer di base.
Regolazione controlli tono
Per ciascun canale attivo regolare i controlli HIGH, MID-MORPH
®
e LOW per ottenere
il suono desiderato (Fig. 11). Usare moderazione quando si effettuano queste
regolazioni, in quanto impostazioni estremamente alte di qualsiasi di questi controlli
può provocare distorsione del suono e aumento della possibilità di feedback sugli
ingressi del microfono.
HIGH
Questo comando equalizzatore alti di tipo shelving del tono attivo varia le
frequenze acute (+/- 15 dB a 12 kHz) ed è stato progettato per rimuovere
rumori o aggiungere brillantezza al segnale, in base alla qualità della fonte.
MID-MORPH
Mentre la gran parte dei comandi a medio raggio funzionano a una sola
frequenza, il Mid-Morph funziona a due frequenze. Se ruotato a sinistra,
taglia a 250 Hz per ridurre le frequenze che sporcano il suono. Se ruotato a
destra, amplifica a 4 kHz per aggiungere intellegibilità alla voce. In entrambi
casi, è possibile ottenere una migliore definizione vocale o strumentale.
LOW
Un equalizzatore di tipo shelving che varia i livelli di frequenza dei bassi
(+/- 15 dB a 80 Hz). L’equalizzatore Low aggiunge profondità a segnali
sottili o pulisce quelli sporchi. Come con qualsiasi equalizzatore, usare con
moderazione. Un uso eccessivo dell’equalizzatore può dare vita a un bottom
end ascendente.
Funzionamento di base:
I cerchi aperti indicano l’intervallo ottimale
Controlli tono
Controllo livello canale
Fig. 10
Fig. 9
Fig. 11
Portare l’interruttore a destra per la posizione “on” -
Regolazione impostazioni effetto
Escort ha effetti digitali integrati. Questi effetti possono essere selezionati nella
sezione MASTER ruotando la manopola EFFECTS SELECT a sinistra o destra fino a
quando l’effetto desiderato non è mostrato sul display (Fig. 12). Una volta che l’effetto
desiderato è visualizzato sullo schermo premere la manopola per selezionare e attivare
l’effetto. Per regolare il parametro dell’effetto basta premere il pulsante PARAMETER
ADJUST (Fig. 12), il parametro disponibile e le sue regolazioni appariranno sul display.
Ruotare la manopola EFFECTS SELECT a sinistra o destra per regolare il parametro,
quindi premere il pulsante PARAMETER ADJUST o la manopola EFFECTS SELECT per
ritornare agli effetti selezionati sullo schermo. Per sentire più o meno effetto, su
qualsiasi canale dato, ruotare la manopola CHANNEL EFX a sinistra per ascoltare meno
effetto e a destra per ascoltare più effetto (Fig. 13). Il pulsante EFX MUTE nella sezione
master (Fig. 12) silenzierà gli effetti su tutti i canali. Non ci sono effetti sugli altri canali
multimediali.
Eliminazione effetti con interruttore a pedale
Il nuovo Escort ha eliminazione effetti con interruttore a pedale. Ciò consente all’utente
di silenziare gli effetti su tutti i canali utilizzando un pulsante singolo a pedale come
l’interruttore a pulsante singolo istantaneo Peavey (03050680) che può essere
acquistato presso il vostro rivenditore Peavey locale. Inserire lo spinotto da 1/4"
dall’interruttore a pedale nel jack EFFECTS DEFEAT sul retro del mixer Escort (Fig. 14).
Una volta collegato, premendo il pulsante dell’interruttore a pedale si commuterà EFX
MUTE (Fig. 12).
Effetti e parametri disponibili
Nome su Schermo Effetto Parametro Disponibile
1 REV Plate Br1 Riverbero a piastra brillante Tempo
2 REV Plate Br2 Riverbero a piastra leggero passo-basso Tempo
3 REV Plate Med Riverbero a piastra medio passo-basso Tempo
4 REV Plate Dk1 Riverbero a piastra forte passo-basso Tempo
5 REV Plate Dk2 Riverbero a piastra scuro Tempo
REV. 1.01 Riverbero sala vocale Tempo
7 REV Vocal Big Riverbero sala vocale forte Tempo
8 REV Vox Warm Riverbero sala vocale colorito Tempo
9 REV Strings Riverbero sala corde Tempo
10 REV Lg Brass Riverbero sala ottoni Tempo
11 REV Vox Air Riverbero stanza vocale aria Tempo
12 REV Vox Club Riverbero stanza vocale club Tempo
13 REV Snare Riverbero stanza timbro tamburo basso Tempo
14 REV Ac Guitar Riverbero stanza chitarra acustica Tempo
15 REV Sm Brass Riverbero stanza ottoni Tempo
16 ENH Tube Accentuatore distorsione tromba: Luminosità
17 ENH Vocal 1 Accentuatore vocale vox Luminosità
18 ENH Vocal 2 Accentuatore vocale vox medio Luminosità
19 DLY Double Ritardo doppio Tempo
20 DLY Slap Ritardo slapback Tempo
21 DLY BRT 1 Ritardo chiaro, poche ripetizioni Tempo
22 DLY BRT 2 Ritardo chiaro, molte ripetizioni Tempo
23 DLY BRT 3 Ritardo chiaro, molte più ripetizioni Tempo
24 DLY Dark 1 Ritardo scuro, poche ripetizioni Tempo
25 DLY Dark 2 Ritardo scuro, più ripetizioni Tempo
26 DLY Dark 3 Ritardo scuro, molte ripetizioni Tempo
27 CHO Deep Slow Profondità alta coro, frequenza lenta Frequenza
28 CHO Mod Wide Profondità moderata coro, frequenza ampia Frequenza
29 CHO Shrt Wide Profondità corta coro, frequenza ampia Frequenza
30 CHO Shrt Fast Profondità corta coro, frequenza veloce Frequenza
31 CHO Deep Mod Profondità alta coro, frequenza moderata Frequenza
Effetti:
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Premere per accedere alla modalità Regolazione
parametri
Controllo effetti canale
Inserire jack interruttore a pedale qui
(Interruttore a pulsante singolo istantaneo
Peavey 03050680)
Premere per SILENZIARE gli effetti su tutti i canali
Ruotare la manopola per trovare l’effetto, premere la
manopola “in” per selezionare e attivare l’effetto
Riproduzione da fonte multimediale
Collegare il dispositivo multimediale come menzionato in precedenza. Quando si
utilizzano jack RCA per un lettore CD, registratore digitale o registratore a nastro,
assicurarsi che il pulsante sia in posizione sollevata in modo che questi jack siano
attivi (Fig. 15). Gli ingressi attivi saranno anche visualizzati sullo schermo nella
sezione master. Utilizzare i controlli sul dispositivo fonte per riprodurre, arrestare, far
avanzare avanti/indietro. Regolare i 7 controlli canale sul mixer Escort per il suono
desiderato. Per la riproduzione multimediale utilizzare un lettore MP3, smartphone o
altro dispositivo simile, assicurarsi che il pulsante sia in posizione sollevata. Collegare
usando un cavo stereo da 3,5 mm menzionato in precedenza e usare il dispositivo
fonte per i controlli di riproduzione. Quando un dispositivo è collegato al jack da
3,5 mm, i jack RCA sono automaticamente disabilitati. Per la riproduzione di un file
MP3 o audio da una memory stick USB, assicurarsi che il pulsante sia in posizione
verso il basso (Fig. 16) in modo che il connettore USB sia attivo.
NOTA:Escortnonconsentelariproduzionesimultaneamenteattraversopiùingressi
multimediali.
Con il vostro dispositivo USB collegato, utilizzare la manopola MEDIA SELECT (Fig. 17)
per navigare attraverso i vostri file audio. Una volta che il file desiderato è visualizzato
sullo schermo, premere la manopola MEDIA SELECT per dare la battuta d’entrata a
tale file. Utilizzare i controlli sul mixer per riprodurre, mettere in pausa, far avanzare
avanti/indietro. Se non si sceglie di navigare o selezionare un certo file, Escort
riprodurrà i file in modo che siano salvati sul vostro dispositivo di memoria USB.
Filenonaudiosarannomostratinellavostranavigazione,manonsiaavràla
riproduzioneaudioseselezionata.Soloileaudiopossonoessereselezionatiperla
riproduzione.
Tipi di file audio supportati
.WAV
.MP3
.WMA
MEDIA:
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Fig. 15
Inserire i jack RCA da dispositivi fonte qui
Inserire un jack stereo da 3,5 mm
da un dispositivo fonte qui
Premere il pulsante finché non si trova in
posizione “in alto” per attivare RCA/3,5 mm
Inserire il dispositivo di memoria USB qui
Utilizzare la manopola per scorrere tra i file
multimediali. Premere la manopola “in” per
dare la battuta d’entrata al file da riprodurre
Utilizzo dei controlli
per PLAY. PAUSE, FORWARD e REVERSE
Premere il pulsante “in” per attivare
l’USB
Utilizzo del Graphic Equalizer
DiversamentedaicontrolliHIGH,MID-MORPHeLOWsuciascuncanalecheregolano
soloiltonodeiproprisegnalidiingresso,l’equalizzatoregracoasettebanderegola
ilbilanciamentodeltonodituttiisegnalichepassanoattraversoilmixeralimentato.
Questoequalizzatoregracoèancheunostrumentopotenteperaiutarearidurreo
eliminareilfeedbackacustico.Ciòoffreall’utentegrandeessibilitànellaregolazione
delsuono,mausamoderazionenelfarequesteregolazioni.
FLS
®
Feedback Locating System
GliindicatoriaLEDdelFLS(sistemadilocalizzazionedelfeedback)sonostrumenti
preziosicheaiutanoaridurre/eliminareilfeedback.Ilfeedbackacusticoèl’urlo
forteosuonoacutochesisenteattraversoisistemiaudiocomerisultatodelsuono
daglialtoparlanticherientraneimicrofoni.PerutilizzarelafunzionalitàFLS,avviare
l’impostazionedituttiicursoriEQgraci(Fig.18)su0.Quindiprimacheilpubblico
arrivi,aumentareMASTERLEVELe/oCHANNELLEVELnchénonsivericailfeedback.
NotarequaleLEDsiilluminaeabbassareleggermenteilcursorecorrispondente.Ciò
riduceilguadagnoallafrequenzadifeedbackepuòessereripetutosenecessario
permigliorareilguadagnoprimadelfeedback.Regolareicursorisolodiunapiccola
quantitàperevitarediinuenzarenegativamente
laqualitàdelsuono.
EQUALIZZAZIONE:
Evitare il feedback acustico
Quandosiincontrailfeedbackèsempremeglioiniziareaguardarelaposizionedimicrofoniedeglialtoparlantinelsistemaprimadifar
ricorsoalleregolazionidiequalizzazione(EQ).Assicurarsicheglialtoparlantisianoposizionatiperdirigereilsuonoversoilpubblicoe
lontanodaimicrofoni.Posizionareimicrofoniquantopiùragionevolmentevicinoallafontesonora.Spostandoilmicrofonopiùvicino
aumentailvolumedelsuonoattraversoilsistemasenzaaumentodelguadagno.
Linee guida per l’utilizzo del microfono
Quandopratico,sipreferisceunmicrofonosingolo.Microfoniaggiuntiviaumentanoilsuonodaglialtoparlantieciascunmicrofonodeve
essereabbassatoperprevenireilfeedback.Tuttavia,sesihannodifcoltàdibilanciamentodellivellodidiversiindividuiconunmicrofono
osenonèancorapossibileottenereunguadagnosufciente,utilizzarepiùmicrofonipuòcostituireunvantaggio.Adesempio,darea
piùcantantiilloromicrofonoconsenteilposizionamentodeimicrofonipiùvicinoaciascuncantante.Ciòaumentailvolumedelsuonoal
microfonoeriducequalsiasieffettodannosoderivantedall’utilizzodipiùmicrofoni.Ciòconsenteanchealvolumediciascunmicrofonodi
essereregolatoseparatamenteperilcorrettobilanciamento.
Imballare l’Escort
®
Unodeitantibenecidell’Escortèchel’interosistemaaudiopossaessereimballatoall’internodellasuacustodiafacilmentetrasportabile
(Fig.19).Iniziarepiegandoisupportidell’altoparlante,quindiassicurarlonelloscompartodiconservazioneusandoleduecinghie.Porrei
microfoniopzionalineilorovani,ponendoicavinellorovanooconilsupportoaltoparlante.Lasciareglialtoparlantirivoltiversoilbasso
sullapartesuperioredelsupportoinferioreeassicurareconquattroblocchi.Escortèoraprontoadesseretrasportatoopostosullesueruote
integratestilevaligia.
Fig. 19
SUGGERIMENTI D’USO GENERALI:
Fig. 19
Fig. 18
Cursori EQ a ZERO
OPZIONI:
ATTENZIONE:Persicurezza,assicurarsidiaprirecompletamenteilsupportodelmixereporlosuunasuperficie
stabileepiana.
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Accessori opzionali (disponibile presso il rivenditore locale Peavey)
Supportimicrofono-Supportomicrofonotripodeconasta(00722910)
Microfonoecaviaggiuntivi-2microfoniPVi
®
concavoincluso(00496360)
Schermiantiventomicrofono-Schermoantiventonero(00069100)
Cavialtoparlanteaggiuntiviinvarielunghezze-25’16AWG(00060450)
Supportialtoparlanteaggiuntiviinvariedimensioni-Supportoaltoparlantenero(00722890)
CaviaudioperlettoreCD,registratoredigitale,registratoreanastroocollegamentolettoreMP3/Smartphone
Grupposupportomixeropzionale(00496340)
Rimuovereilsupportomixerdall’alloggiamento.Ilsupportomixerconsisteditreparti:duecoppiedigambeemembriincrociatidisupporto
(Fig.20).Bloccareilmembroincrociatodisupportoconlepresedellagambeinsiemecomemostrato(Fig.21).Inserirecompletamenteun
setdigambeneimembriincrociati(Fig.22).Mantenereancorainsiemeimembriincrociati,impostarelegambesulpavimentoeinserirela
secondacoppiadigambe.Seservespostareilsupporto,trasportarlopiegatomantenendolegambe.
Fig. 20 Fig. 21 Fig. 22
Specifiche tecniche Escort
®
3000:
Correnteinuscita: 80wattRMS(percanale)
Rispostadifrequenza: da40Hza20kHz+/-3dB
Protezionesovratensione: 10dBdiDDT™chelimital’uscitaPAperprevenireil
tagliochepuòdanneggiareglialtoparlanti
Distorsione: Menodi0,2%THD@potenzamax
Rapportosegnale/disturbo: 88dBingressomicrofonotipico
AlimentazioneCA: 115VCA60Hzo
230VCA50/60Hz
Pesoassemblato:
(supportiinclusi)
50lbs.(22,67kg)
Dimensioni: 14,5"alt.x36,75"largh.x15,5"diam.
(36,8cmx93,3cmx39,4cm)
Altoparlanti: Woofer10"(254mm)
Tweetertrombapiezoelettrica
Guida risoluzione problemi Escort
®
3000
Problema Verifica Correzione
Nessunsuono
(LCDnonsiaccende)
L’alimentazioneèattiva?
Ilcavodilineaècollegatoaunapresaalimentata?
Attivarel’interruttoredialimentazione.Collegare
ilcavodialimentazioneaunapresaalimentata
Nessunsuono
(LCDnonsiaccende)
IcontrolliMASTEReCHANNELGAINsonoattivi? RegolareicontrolliMASTEReCHANNELLEVEL
versol’altoallivellodesiderato.Controllarei
collegamentidell’altoparlante.Attivarel’interrut-
toredelmicrofono.Vericarelaconnessionedel
microfonoedellafonteaudio.
Nessuneffetto IcontrolliEFXcanalesonoattivi?L’EFXMUTEmaster
èabilitato?Uneffettoèattivatonelmenu?
Assicurarsichel’effettodesideratosiaseleziona-
tonelmenueffettoMaster.Vericarel’EFXMUTE
master.SeilLEDèilluminato,l’EFXMUTEèattivo.
PremereunavoltailpulsanteEFXMUTEperdi-
sabilitare.RegolareilcontrolloEFXcanalenché
l’effettoaudioèsentito.
Ilesudispositivodimemoria
USBnonsonoriprodotti
Illeèprontoperlariproduzione?
Ileaudiosononelformatocorretto?
AssicurarsicheunavoltachelamanopolaMEDIA
SELECTèruotatapervisualizzareilledesidera-
to,lamanopolaèquindipremutaperattivareil
le.Assicurarsicheileaudiosianonelformato
corretto.Sivedalalistadeiformatiaudiosuppor-
tatimenzionatiinprecedenzainquestomanuale.
Urloforteosuonoacutodagli
altoparlanti
SecisiallontanaquandoicontrolliCHANNELo
MASTERLEVELsonoabbassati,sivericafeedback
acustico.
Ridurreilguadagnodelmicrofono.Riposizionare
ilmicrofonodietroopiùlontanodaglialtoparlan-
ti.OsservarelaspiaFLSsull’EQeridurreillivello
delcursorecorrispondente.
Suonodistorto IlCHANNELGAINèimpostatoaunlivelloalto? RidurreCHANNELGAINeaumentareMASTER
VOLUME
Parabéns! Você acaba de adquirir o mais admirável sistema de áudio profissional portátil do mundo. O design integrado do Escort
permite fácil transporte, enquanto seus controles de usuário amigáveis oferecem facilidade de operação, tornando-o a escolha
perfeita para escolas, igrejas, organizações civis além de DJs e pequenos grupos musicais. O Escort apresenta auto-falantes de
duas vias duplos controlados por um mixer amplificado de sete canais, tornando-o ideal para aplicações vocais, musicais e de
DJ. O mixer inclui um canal de mídia com diversas entradas para diversas opções de reprodução, além de recursos de qualidade
profissional como uma seção de efeitos digital, interrupção de efeitos via pedal e um equalizador gráfico de sete faixas principal
com FLS
®
(sistema de localização de retorno). A maleta de transporte fornece armazenamento adicional para microfones, cabos e
quaisquer equipamentos opcionais necessários. A maleta do Escort fornece travas para montagem de auto-falantes, diversas alças
para várias opções de transporte e rodinhas para fácil transporte. Leia essas instruções cuidadosamente e desfrute de seu novo
Escort 3000 da Peavey.
Sistema de Áudio Profissional Portátil
Recursos:
• Pacoteconvenientecomrodinhasdeestilodemalasdeviagem
• Sistemadeauto-falantesdeduasviascomwooferde10"ecornetapiezoelétrica
• Mixeramplicadodesetecanais
• ReproduçãodeMP3USB
• Efeitosdigitaisdealtaqualidade
• 6entradasdecombinaçãoXLRde1/4"
• RCAestéreo,3,5mmeentradasdemídiaUSBparareprodução
• EqualizadorgrácodesetefaixascomFLS
®
• Pedestaisdeauto-falantecomdobradupla
• 2cabosdeauto-falantede15'
• Compartimentosdearmazenamentoparamicrofones,cabos,etc.
• Interrupçãodeefeitosviapedal
• MicrofoneecaboPV*
• Pedestaldemixer*
* Indicarecursosopcionais.Disponívelemalgunsmodelos
Escort
®
3000
PORTUGUÊS
MuitasdasconguraçõesdoEscort
®
sãoparecidasàconguraçãodeoutrossistemasdesomemuitosaspectosexigemum
sensocomum.Asegurançadevesempreestaremprimeirolugar.Sempreusetomadasaterradasecabosdeextensãoelétrica
comtrêsos.Coloqueoscabosdesistemadesomdeformaaprevenirperigoscomotropeçoseamarre-oscomtacaso
necessário.Coloqueospedestaisdeauto-falanteemumasuperfíciesólidaenivelada.Seguiressasorientaçõesajudaráaevitar
ferimentospessoaisedanosaoequipamento,garantindoanosdeusolivredeproblemas.
PENSE PRIMEIRO COM SEGURANÇA!
Guia de configuração
Ajuste do mixer e auto-falantes
Coloque próximo à unidade para que os auto-falantes fiquem para cima. Libere as travas erguendo-as até que elas se soltem. Remova os auto-
falantes da maleta.
OBSERVAÇÃO:Astravaspodemsefechadasapósosauto-falantesseremremovidos.Istoérecomendadoparaevitarinterferênciacom
aremoçãodeoutroscomponentes.Istotambémajudaráaevitardanosàstravas.Fecheastravasempurrando-asatéquequemplanas
comalateraldamaleta,eemseguida,empurre-asparabaixoatéquesetravem.
emova os pedestais dos auto-falantes da maleta. Certifique-se de que as pernas do pedestal estejam totalmente estendidas para fornecer
uma base estável para os auto-falantes e que estejam posicionadas em uma superfície nivelada. Aperte o parafuso de aperto manual na
base o suficiente, sem excesso (Fig. 1). Eleve os pedestais do auto-falante até a altura desejada, aperte o parafuso de aperto manual e
instale o pino de segurança conforme mostrado (Fig. 2).
AVISO!Conectesomenteosauto-falantesquevemjuntocomo
mixer.Osauto-falantesEscortfornecemcargaótimaparaomixer
amplicadoeousodeoutrosauto-falantespoderesultarem
danosaoequipamento.
Coloque os auto-falantes nos pedestais e posicione-os para que fiquem de frente à plateia e longe dos microfones (Fig. 3). Conecte os cabos do
auto-falante do conector na parte frontal inferior do auto-falante para as saídas dele na parte de trás do mixer. Conecte o auto-falante esquerdo
ao LEFT OUTPUT (saída esquerda) e o direito na RIGHT OUTPUT (saída direita) (Fig. 4).
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
OU
Insira os conectores do auto-
falante aqui
Conexão de energia
AVISO!Antesdeconectaraenergiacertique-sequea
chavedeenergiaestejanaposiçãoOFF(desligada).
Conexão das fontes de reprodução de mídia
O mixer amplificado Escort aceita diversos dispositivos de reprodução de mídia. Para
conexão de um tocador de CD ou gravador aterrado utilize as conexões CHANNEL 7 RCA
esquerda e direita. Para conexão de um tocador de MP3 ou smartphone com reprodução
de mídia utilize o conector estéreo de 3,5 mm. Isto necessitará de um cabo de 3,5 mm
estéreo (03007820) que pode ser encontrado em seu revendedor Peavey local. Ao
utilizar um cartão de memória USB com MP3 ou outros arquivos de áudio armazenados
nele, insira o cartão de memória no conector USB no CHANNEL 7 e utilize a tela e
controles na seção principal para navegar e tocar os arquivos de áudio (Fig. 7).
Conecte o cabo de energia IEC à tomada no painel traseiro da unidade
conforme mostrado (Fig. 8) e em seguida, a uma tomada elétrica adequada.
Se um cabo de extensão elétrica for necessário, certifique-se de que tenha
três fios com um pino terra intacto para preservar o terra de segurança.
NOTE: FOR UK ONLY
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond
with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
(1) The wire that is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal
that is marked by the letter E, or by the Earth symbol, or coloured green or green
and yellow. (2) The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that
is marked with the letter N, or the colour black. (3) The wire that is coloured brown
must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L, or the colour red.
Conexão do(s) microfone(s) ou entrada(s) de linha
O mixer amplificado Escort é projetado para trabalhar com qualquer microfone dinâmico ou condensador de boa qualidade, balanceado como
a série de microfones PV
®
i da Peavey. Conecte o microfone ao conector de entrada XLR (de três pinos) conforme mostrado (Fig. 5). Se utilizar
diversos microfones, conecte-os na ordem que estarão no palco para fácil ajuste de cada um. Para conectar um dispositivo de nível de linha
como um teclado, utilize o cabo de instrumentos de 1/4" e insira-o no centro do conector combo XLR de 1/4" conforme mostrado (Fig. 6).
Fig. 6
Fig. 5
Insira o dispositivo de memória USB aqui
Utilize o botão para procurar arquivos de
mídia
Insira o cabo de energia aqui
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Pressione o botão “para dentro”
para ativar o USB
Ajuste dos controles e energização da unidade
Antes de ligar a energia, certifique-se de que todos os auto-falantes, microfones e
outros dispositivos de entrada estejam conectados. Coloque os controles da seção
principal na posição de 12 horas do relógio e todos os outros controles para baixo
(girados completamente para a esquerda). Ligue a unidade colocando a chave ON/
OFF localizada na parte de trás do mixer (Fig. 9) para a posição ON.
Ajuste dos controles de ganho e de volume
O ajuste ótimo para o mixer amplificado e auto-falantes incluídos é marcado no
controle MASTER LEVEL (nível principal) (Fig. 10). Ajuste o controle CHANNEL LEVEL
(Fig. 11) até que o volume desejado seja atingido. Se o volume desejado for atingido
com o CHANNEL LEVEL virado para baixo para uma das três primeiras posições, vire
o MASTER LEVEL para baixo para colocar o CHANNEL LEVEL para cima. Se o volume
desejado for atingido quando o CHANNEL LEVEL estiver próximo do máximo, eleve o
MASTER LEVEL para que você possa diminuir o CHANNEL LEVEL. Estas funções são as
mesmas de um mixer básico.
Ajuste dos controles de tom
Para cada canal ativo ajuste os controles HIGH, MID-MORPH
®
, e LOW para alcançar
o som desejado (Fig. 11). Use moderação ao realizar esses ajustes, pois ajustes
extremos de quaisquer desses controles levam a uma distorção do som e a uma
chance maior de entradas de retorno no microfone.
HIGH
Este EQ alto do tipo shelving de controle de tom varia a frequência de
agudos (+/- 15 dB a 12 kHz) e é projetado para remover o ruído ou adicionar
brilho ao sinal, dependendo da qualidade da fonte.
MID-MORPH
Enquanto a maioria dos controles de faixa média funcionam com apenas
uma frequência, o Mid-Morph funciona com duas. Quando girado para
a esquerda, ele corta a 250 Hz para reduzir frequências que sujariam o
som. Quando girado para a direita, ele aumenta em 4 kHz para adicionar
inteligibilidade aos vocais. De qualquer forma, a definição de vocal ou
instrumento melhorada pode ser atingida.
LOW
Um tipo shelving de EQ que varia os níveis de frequência de graves (+/-
15 dB a 80Hz). O EQ de baixa adiciona profundidade aos sinais de som fino
ou limpa aqueles sujos. Como qualquer EQ, use de forma moderada. Abusar
desse EQ pode fornecer um final estrondoso.
Operação básica:
Círculos abertos indicam faixa ótima
Controles de tom
Controle de nível de canal
Fig. 10
Fig. 9
Fig. 11
Gire a chave para a direita na posição “ON”.
Ajuste de configurações de efeito
O Escort tem efeitos digitais integrados. Esses efeitos podem ser selecionados na seção
MASTER girando o botão EFFECTS SELECT (seleção de efeitos) para a esquerda ou direita
até o efeito desejado ser mostrado no visor (Fig. 12). Uma vez que o efeito desejado
seja exibido no visor, aperte o botão na posição selecionada para ativar o efeito. Para
ajustar o parâmetro de efeito basta pressionar o botão PARAMETER ADJUST (ajuste de
parâmetro) (Fig. 12) no parâmetro disponível e este ajuste será exibido no visor. Gire
o botão EFFECTS SELECT para a esquerda ou direita para ajustar o parâmetro e então
pressione o botão PARAMETER ADJUST ou o EFFECTS SELECT para retornar ao visor de
seleção de efeitos. Para ouvir mais ou menos do efeito, em qualquer canal, gire o botão
CHANNEL EFX (efeitos de canal) para a esquerda para ouvir menos e para a direita para
ouvir mais do efeito (Fig. 13). O botão EFX MUTE (silenciar efeitos) na seção principal
(Fig. 12) silenciará os efeitos em todos os canais. Não há efeitos nos canais de mídia.
Interrupção de efeitos via pedal
Seu novo Escort tem interrupção de efeitos via pedal. Isto permite que o usuário silencie
os efeitos em todos os canais utilizando apenas um botão de pedal como a chave
de botão único momentânea (03050680) da Peavey que pode ser adquirida em seu
revendedor Peavey local. Insira o plugue de 1/4" do pedal no conector EFFECTS DEFEAT
(interrupção de efeitos) na parte traseira do mixer Escort (Fig. 14). Uma vez conectado,
pressionar o botão de pedal acionará o EFX MUTE (Fig. 12).
Efeitos e parâmetros disponíveis
Nome no Visor Efeito Parâmetro Disponível
1 REV Plate Br1 Brilho de reverberação de prato Tempo
2 REV Plate Br2 Passa baixa moderado de reverberação de
prato
Tempo
3 REV Plate Med Passa baixa médio de reverberação de prato Tempo
4 REV Plate Dk1 Passa baixa pesado de reverberação de prato Tempo
5 REV Plate Dk2 Escurecimento de reverberação de prato Tempo
6 REV Vocal Vocal de reverberação de salão Tempo
7 REV Vocal Big Vocal de reverberação de salão vasto Tempo
8 REV Vox Warm Vocal de reverberação de salão quente Tempo
9 REV Strings Notas de reverberação de salão Tempo
10 REV Lg Brass Metal de reverberação de salão Tempo
11 REV Vox Air Ar vocal de reverberação de sala Tempo
12 REV Vox Club Clube vocal de reverberação de sala Tempo
13 REV Snare Corda baixa de reverberação de sala Tempo
14 REV Ac Guitar Violão acústico de reverberação de sala Tempo
15 REV Sm Brass Metal de reverberação de sala Tempo
16 ENH Tube Reforçador de distorção de tubo Brilho
17 ENH Vocal 1 Reforçador vocal Vox Brilho
18 ENH Vocal 2 Reforçador vocal Vox médio Brilho
19 DLY Double Atraso duplo Tempo
20 DLY Slap Atraso de graves Tempo
21 DLY BRT 1 Atraso de brilho, poucas repetições Tempo
22 DLY BRT 2 Atraso de brilho, mais repetições Tempo
23 DLY BRT 3 Atraso de brilho, maioria de repetições Tempo
24 DLY Dark 1 Atraso de escurecimento, poucas repetições Tempo
25 DLY Dark 2 Atraso de escurecimento, mais repetições Tempo
26 DLY Dark 3 Atraso de escurecimento, maioria de repetições Tempo
27 CHO Deep Slow Profundidade de coro alta, taxa baixa Taxa
28 CHO Mod Wide Profundidade de coro moderada, taxa larga Taxa
29 CHO Shrt Wide Profundidade de coro curta, taxa larga Taxa
30 CHO Shrt Fast Profundidade de coro curta, taxa rápida Taxa
31 CHO Deep Mod Profundidade de coro alta, taxa moderada Taxa
Efeitos:
Fig. 12
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Pressione para inserir o modo de ajuste de
parâmetros
Controle de efeitos de canal
Insira o conector de pedal aqui
(Chave de botão único momentânea Peavey
03050680)
Pressione para SELENCIAR os efeitos em todos os
canais
Gire o botão para encontrar o efeito, pressione-o “para
dentro” para selecionar e ativar o efeito
Reprodução a partir da fonte de mídia
Eleve seu dispositivo de fonte de mídia conforme mencionado previamente. Ao utilizar
conectores RCA para um tocador de CD, gravador, ou equipamento de fita certifique-se
que o botão esteja na posição para cima para poder ativar esses conectores (Fig. 15).
Quais entradas estão ativas será também exibido no visor na seção principal. Utilize
os controles no dispositivo fonte para as funções de reproduzir, parar, avançar e
retroceder. Ajuste os controles do canal 7 no mixer Escort para o som desejado. Para
reprodução de mídia utilizando um tocador de MP3, smartphone, ou outro dispositivo
similar certifique-se que o botão permaneça na posição para cima. Conecte utilizando
um cabo de 3,5 mm estéreo mencionado anteriormente e utilize o dispositivo fonte
para controles de reprodução. Quando um dispositivo é conectado a um conector de
3,5 mm, os conectores RCA são desativados automaticamente. Para reprodução de
arquivos MP3 ou de áudio a partir de uma memória USB, certifique-se de que o botão
esteja na posição para baixo (Fig. 16) para que o plugue USB fique ativo.
OBSERVAÇÃO:OEscortnãopermitereproduçãoatravésdediversasentradasde
mídiasimultaneamente.
Com seu dispositivo USB conectado, utilize o botão MEDIA SELECT (seleção de mídia)
(Fig. 17) para navegar através de seus arquivos de áudio. Uma vez que o arquivo
desejado seja exibido no visor pressione o botão MEDIA SELECT para selecionar esse
arquivo. Utilize os controles no dispositivo fonte para as funções de reproduzir, parar,
avançar e retroceder. Se você não escolher navegar ou selecionar certo arquivo, o
Escort tocará os arquivos na ordem que estão armazenados em seu dispositivo de
memória USB.
Nenhumarquivodeáudioseráexibidoemsuanavegação,enãohaveránenhuma
reproduçãodeáudiocasoselecionado.Somentearquivosdeáudioserão
selecionadosparareprodução.
Tipos de arquivo de áudio suportados
.WAV
.MP3
.WMA
MÍDIA:
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
Fig. 15
Insira conectores RCA a partir do dispositivo fonte aqui
Insira um conector estéreo de
3,5 mm a partir do dispositivo
fonte aqui
Pressione o botão até a posição “elevada”
para ativar os conectores RCA/3,5 mm
Insira o dispositivo de memória USB aqui
Utilize o botão para procurar arquivos de mídia.
Empurre o botão para “dentro” para selecionar
o arquivo para reprodução
Utilize controles para
REPRODUÇÃO. PAUSA, AVANÇO e RETROCESSO
Pressione o botão “para dentro” para
ativar o USB
Utilização do Graphic Equalizer
DiferentedoscontrolesHIGH,MID-MORPH,eLOWemcadacanalqueajustasomente
otomdeseusprópriossinaisdeentrada,oequalizadorgrácodesetefaixasajusta
obalançotonaldetodosossinaisquevãoaomixeramplicado.Esteequalizador
grácoétambémumaferramentapoderosaparaajudarareduziroueliminaroretorno
acústico.Istoofereceaousuáriograndeexibilidadenoajustedosom,masfaçaesses
ajustescommoderação.
FLS
®
Feedback Locating System
OsindicadoresLEDdeFLS(sistemadelocalizaçãoderetorno)sãoferramentasvaliosas
naajudaemreduzir/eliminaroretorno.Oretornoacústicoéouivoaltoouguincho
ouvidoatravésdesistemasdesomcomoresultadodosomdosauto-falantesentrando
novamentenosmicrofones.ParautilizarorecursoFLS,comececolocandotodasas
chavesdeslizantesdoequalizadorgráco(Fig.18)para0.Emseguida,antesquea
plateiachegue,aumenteoMASTERLEVELe/ouCHANNELLEVELatéqueocorraoretorno.
ObservequalLEDseacendeelentamentediminuaachavedeslizantecorrespondente.
Istoreduzoganhonafrequênciaderetornoepodeserrepetidosenecessáriopara
melhoraroganhoantesdoretorno.Ajustesomenteaschavesdeslizantesumpouco
paraevitardeafetaradversamente
aqualidadedesom.
EQUALIZAÇÃO:
Evitando retorno acústico
Aoencontrarumretornoésempremelhorcomeçaracolocarosmicrofoneseauto-falantesnosistemaantesdemexernosajustesde
equalização(EQ).Certique-sequeosauto-falantesestejamposicionadosparaconduzirosomparaaplateiaelongedosmicrofones.
Posicioneosmicrofonesomaispertodafontedesomconformerazoável.Moveromicrofonemaispertoaumentaovolumedosomatravés
dosistemasemterqueaumentaroganho.
Orientações sobre o uso do microfone
Quandoprático,umúnicomicrofoneépreferido.Microfonesadicionaisobtêmmaissomdosauto-falantesecadamicrofonedeveentãoser
diminuídoparaevitaroretorno.Contudo,sevocêtiverdiculdadeembalancearoníveldeindivíduosdiferentescomummicrofoneouse
vocêaindanãoconsegueganhoosuciente,usarmaismicrofonespodeoferecerumavantagem.Porexemplo,daradiversoscantoresseu
própriomicrofonepermiteacolocaçãodelesbemmaispertodecadacantor.Istoaumentaovolumedosomnomicrofoneedelongeresolve
qualquerefeitoprejudicialdousodediversosmicrofones.Istotambémpermitequeovolumedecadamicrofonesejaajustadodeforma
separadaparabalançoadequado.
Embalagem do Escort
®
UmdosmuitosbenefíciosdoEscortéquetodoosistemadesompodeserempacotadodentrodesuamaletadetransportefácil(Fig.19).
Comecedobrandoospedestaisdoauto-falanteeentãoxe-osemseucompartimentodearmazenamentoutilizandoasduastiras.Coloque
o(s)microfone(s)adicional(is)emseucompartimentodearmazenamento,colocandooscabosnooutrocompartimentooucomospedestais
doauto-falante.Coloqueosauto-falantescomafaceparabaixoacimadapartedebaixodaguiaeaperteasquatrotravas.OEscortestá
agoraprontoparasertransportadooucolocadoemsuasrodinhasintegradasdemaladeviagem.
Fig. 19
DICAS DE USO GERAL:
Fig. 19
Fig. 18
Chaves deslizantes do equalizador em ZERO
OPCIONAIS:
AVISO:Parasegurança,certifique-sedeabrircompletamenteopedestaldomixerecolocá-loemumasuperfícieestávele
nivelada.
Fig. 20
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Acessórios opcionais (disponíveis a partir de seu revendedor Peavey)
Pedestaisdemicrofone-pedestaldemicrofonetripécomhaste(00722910)
Microfonesecabosadicionais-microfonePVi
®
2comcaboincluído(00496360)
Espumasdemicrofone-espumapreta(00069100)
Cabosdeauto-falanteadicionaisemdiversostamanhos-25'16AWG(00060450)
Pedestaisadicionaisdeauto-falanteemdiversostamanhos-pedestaldeauto-falantepreto(00722890)
CabosdeáudioparatocadordeCD,gravador,equipamentodeta,ouconexãodetocadordeMP3/smartphone
Conjuntodepedestaldemixeropcional(00496340)
Removaopedestaldomixerdamaleta.Opedestaldomixerconsistedetrêspartes:doisparesdepernaseosmembroscruzados
dopedestal(Fig.20).Segureomembrocruzadodopedestalcomossoquetesdepernajuntosconformemostrado(Fig.21).Encaixe
completamenteoconjuntodepernasnosmembroscruzados(Fig.22).Continuesegurandoosmembroscruzadosjuntos,coloqueaspernas
nochãoeencaixeosegundopardepernas.Seprecisarmoveropedestal,carregue-odobradosegurandoaspernas.
Fig. 20 Fig. 21 Fig. 22
Especificações do Escort
®
3000:
Potênciadesaída: 80WRMS(porcanal)
Respostaemfrequência: 40Hza20kHz(+/-3dB)
Proteçãodesobrecarga: 10dBdeDDT™quelimitaasaídadeáudioprossional
paraevitarocortequepodedanicarosauto-falantes
Distorção: Menorque0,2%THDnapotênciamáxima
Relaçãosinal/ruído: Entradademicrofonetípicade88dB
EnergiaAC: 115VAC60Hzou
230VAC50/60Hz
Pesomontado:
(pedestaisincluídos)
50lb.(22,67kg)
Dimensões: 14.5"Ax36.75"Lx15.5"P
(36,8cmx93,3cmx39,4cm)
Auto-falantes: Woofer10"(254mm)
Tweeterdecornetapiezoelétrica
Guia de solução de problemas do Escort
®
3000
Problema Verifique Correção
Nenhumsom
(LCDnãoacende)
Aenergiaestáligada?
Ocabodeenergiaestáconectadoaumatomada
comenergia?
Ligueachavedeenergia.Conecteocabodeener-
giaaumatomadacomenergia.
Nenhumsom
(LCDnãoseacende)
OscontrolesMASTEReCHANNELGAINestãopara
cima?
AjusteambososcontrolesMASTEReCHANNEL
LEVELparacimanoníveldesejado.Veriqueas
conexõesdoauto-falante.Ligueomicrofone.Veri-
queaconexãodomicrofoneedafontedesom.
Semefeitos OscontrolesEFXdecanalestãoparacima?
OEFXMUTEprincipalestáativado?
Háumefeitoativadonomenu?
Certique-sequeoefeitodesejadoestejasele-
cionadonomenudeefeitoprincipal.Veriqueo
EFXMUTEprincipal.SeoLEDestiveraceso,oEFX
MUTEestáativo.PressioneobotãoEFXMUTEuma
vezparadesativar.AjusteocontroleEFXdecanal
atéqueoefeitodeáudiosejaouvido.
Arquivosnodispositivode
memóriaUSBnãotocam
Oarquivoestáselecionadoparareprodução?
Osarquivosdeáudioestãonoformatoapropriado?
Certique-sequeobotãoMEDIASELECTesteja
giradoparaexibiroarquivodesejadoequeseja
pressionadoparaselecionaroarquivo.Certique-
sequeseusarquivosdeáudio
estejamnoformato
correto.Consultealistadeformatosdeáudio
suportadosmencionadaanteriormenteneste
manual.
Uivoautoouguinchodosauto-
falantes
SeeledesaparecerquandooscontrolesCHANNEL
ouMASTERLEVELestiveremparabaixo,entãoéum
retornoacústico.
Reduzaoganhodomicrofone.Reposicioneo
microfoneatrásoumaislongedosauto-falantes.
ObservealuzFLSacimadoequalizadorereduzao
níveldachavedeslizantecorrespondente.
Osomestádistorcido OCHANNELGAINestáemumajustemuitoalto? ReduzaoCHANNELGAINeaumenteoMASTER
VOLUME
世界のポ PA シスお買ただがといまEscort ルデは、
動しすさ考慮ると時にユーフレドリなコトロルにり、作をやすし、校、会、民組
DJEscort 7ネル
でドライブするデュアルツーウェイスピーカー。音声、音楽DJ の用途に理想的です。ミキサーは、メディアチャネル
の入で複の再オプョン対応、デタルフェトセショ、フトスッチ応エェクディィー
ト、FLS
®
(フィードバクロケーティグシステム) 7ンドスターグラフィッ EQ などプロ様の機能を備えま
す。キャリーケースには、マイク、ケーブルなども収容できます。Escort のケースは、スピーカーを取り付けるラッチ、
さまざまなキャリーオプションに使用するハンドル、持ち運びに便利な車輪を備えます。本書をよく読み、Peavey Escort
3000 をお楽しみください。
ポータブル PA システム
特徴:
使いやすいパッケージタイプ、スーツケーススタイルの車輪付き
ツーウェイスピーカーシステム、10" ウーファー、ピエゾホーン
7チャネルパワードミキサー
USB MP3 再生
高品質デジタルエフェクト
6x XLR - 1/4" コンビネーション入力
ステレオ RCA3.5 mmUSB メディア入力からメディア再生
7バンドグラフィックEQFLS
®
2つの折り畳み式スピーカースタンド
2x 15' スピーカーケーブル
マイク、ケーブルなどの収容ボックス
フットスイッチ対応エフェクトディフィート
PV マイク、ケーブル*
ミキサースタンド*
* オプション機能です。モデルによって異なります。
Escort
®
3000
日本語
Escort
®
のセットアップは、他のサウンドシステムのセットアップと似ており、一般常識の必要な部分多くあります。常
に安全を第一に考えてください。コンセントは常に接地し、3線の延長コードを使用してください。危険な状態や転倒を
ぐようにサウンドシステムのケーブルを配線し、必要に応じて固定します。スピーカースタンドとミキサーを、表面が平ら
で安定した場所に置きます。このガイドラインを守ることで、人身の障害や機器の破損を防ぎ、製品を故障なく長く使用す
ることができます。
安全第一!
セットアップガイド
ミキサーとスピーカーのセットアップ
スピーカーが上側に来るように本体をケースに入った状態でセットします。ラッチを外れるまで持ち上げて解除します。スピーカーを
ケースから取り出します。
:ピーカーを取り外すとラッチがかかります。これは他のコンポーネントの取り外しの邪魔になるのを防ぐためです。またラッチ
の破損を防ぐためでもあります。ラッチを閉じるには、ケースの側面に揃うまで押し、固定されるまで押し下げます。
スピーカースタンドをケースから取り出します。スタンドの脚が十分に伸びていて、スピーカーの土台として安定していること、平ら
な面にあることを確認します。ベースの蝶ネジを締めます。締め付けすぎないように注意してください(図 1)。スピーカースタンド
を必要な高さまで上げ、蝶ネジを締め、図のように安全ピンを取り付けます(図 2)。
警告! ミキサーには付属のスピーカー以外のスピーカーを接続
しないでくださいEscort スピーカーはパワードミキサーに最適
な負に設してり、のスーカを使する機器
損することがあります。
スピーカーをスタンドに置き、聴き手の方を向くように、マイクから離して配置します( 3。スピーカー下前面にあるジャックか
らミキサー背面にあるスピーカー出力にスピーカーケーブルを接続します。左スピーカーは「左出力」に、右スピーカーは「右出力
に接続します(図 4)。
3
4
1
2
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
ここにスピーカージャ
ックをセット
電源の接続
源を電源フ」
位置になっていることを確認します。
メディア再生ソースの接
Escort パワードミキサーはさまざまなメディア再生デバイスに対応しますCD プレ
ーヤーや接地したレコードプレーヤーを接続するには、チャネル 7 RCA の左右のコ
クタを使用します。MP3 レーヤーやスマートフォンを接続するには、3.5 mm ステ
レオコネクタを使用します。これに 3.5 mm テレオケーブ (03007820) が必要
す。最寄りの Peavey ィーラーで入手できます。MP3 などのオーディオファイル
保存し USB メモリスティックを使用する場合、チャネル 7 USB コネクタにセッ
トし、マスターセクションの画面とコントロールを使い、オーディオファイルを選択
・再生します( 7)。
図のようにIEC 電源コードを本体のバックパネルにあるコンセントに
接続し(図 8、次に壁コンセントに接続します延長コードを使用する場
は、ンド3ード使
ださい。
NOTE: FOR UK ONLY
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond
with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
(1) The wire that is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal
that is marked by the letter E, or by the Earth symbol, or coloured green or green and
yellow. (2) The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that is
marked with the letter N, or the colour black. (3) The wire that is coloured brown must
be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L, or the colour red.
マイク、ライン入力の接続
Escort ワードミキサーは、Peavey PV
®
i マイクなど、良質、平衡、ダイナミック、またはコンデンサタイプのマイクに対応するよう
に設計されています。図のように、XLR3ピン) 入力コネクタにマイクを接続します(図 7)。複数のマイクを使用する場合、各マ
イクを調整しやすいように、ステージ上と同じ順序で接続します。キーボードなどのラインレベルデバイスを接続するには、1/4"
ーブルを使用し、図のように、XLR-1/4" コンボコネクタの中央にセットします(図 6)。
6
5
電源コードをここにセット
7
8
ボタンを押して"イン"にしてUSBを使用
USBメモリデバイスをここにセット
ノブでメディアファイルを選択
コントロールの設定、本体電源オン
電源を入れる前に、すべてのスピーカー、マイク、他の入力デバイスが接続され
ていることを確認します。マスターセクションのコントロール12の位置に
ットし、他のコントロールはすべて下げます(左に回し切ります)。電源を入れ
るには、ミキサー背面にある ON/OFF スイッチ(図 9)を ON 位置にします。
ゲイン、ボリュームコントロールの調節
サー MASTER LEVEL
(図 10)に示してあります。ボリュームの調節は「チャネルレベル」コントロー
ル(図 11)で行います。「チャネルレベル」を最初の3の位置の1に下げた状
態で目的のボリュームが得られる場合、「チャネルレベル」を上げられるように
「マスターレベル」を下げます。「チャネルレベル」が最大に近い状態で目的の
ボリュームが得られる場合は、「チャネルレベル」
下げられるように「マスタ
ーレベル」を上げます。この操作はミキサー機能に共通です。
トーンコントロールの調節
目的のサウンドを得るには、アクティブなチャネルごとに HIGHMID-MORPH
®
LOW コントロールを調節します(図 11)。この調整では極端な設定は避けてくだ
さい。コントロールを極端な設定にすると、音が歪んだりマイク入力のハウリン
グが大きくなったりすることがあります。
HIGH
トレブル周波数 (+/-15 dB / 12 kHz) を変え、ソースの質に応じてノイズ
を除去したり信号にブリリアンスを加えたりするハイ EQ ェルヴィン
グタイプのアクティブトーンコントロールです。
MID-MORPH
1
が、ミッドモーフ2の周波数で有効です。左に回すと、250 Hz でカ
ットし、音が濁る周波数を減らします。右に回すと4 kHz
でブース
し、ボーカルにメリハリをつけます。どちらの場合もボーカルや楽器の
輪郭を際立たせます。
LOW
E Q 調
(+/- 15 dB/80 Hz)。ロー EQ は、音に厚みのない信号に深みを加えるか、
音の濁った信号をクリーンにします。他の EQ と同じく控えめに使用し
す。この EQ が多すぎると、低音がブーンと大きく響くこともあります。
基本操作
丸印が最適設定範囲
トーンコントロール
チャネルレベルコントロール
10
9
11
スイッチを右に押して"オン" 位置にする
設定の調節
Escort はデジタルエフェクトを内蔵しています。このエフェクトは、「マスター」
ショして 12。エ
ェクトが画面に表示されたら、ノブを押して「イン」にし、エフェクトをオンしま
す。エフェクトパラメータを調節するには、「パラメータ調節」ボタン(図 12)を
押します。調整内容が画面に表示されます。「エフェクト選択」ノブを左右に回し
てパラメータを調節し、「パラメータ調節」ボタンまたは「エフェクト選択」ノブ
を押してエフェクト選択画面に戻ります。所定のチャネルでエフェクトを多くある
いは少なくして聞くには、「チャネ EFX」ノブを左に回してエフェクトを少なく
して聞き、右に回してエフェクトを多くして聞きます(図 13)。マスターセクショ
ンにあるEFX ミュート」ボタン(図 12)はすべてのチャネルのエフェクトをミュ
ートします
。メディアチャネルにはエフェクトはありません。
チ対応
この新しい Escort にはフットスイッチに対応したエフェクトディフィートがありま
す。これは、Peavey シングルボタン モメンタリスイッ (03050680) などのシング
ルボタンのフットスイッチを使用してすべてのチャネルのエフェクトをミュートす
ることがきます。メンタリイッチは寄り Peavey ディーラで入手で
ます。フットスイッチから Escort ミキサー背面にある「エフェクトディフィート」
ジャックに 1/4" プラグをセットします( 14)。接続後、フットスイッチのボ
ンを押すと「EFX ミュート」が切り替わります(図 12)。
使用
画面上の名前 使用
1 REV Plate Br1 レーバー 時間
2 REV Pla
te Br2 レーバーロー 時間
3 REV Plate Med レーバーーパ 時間
4 REV Plate Dk1 レーバーブハーーパ 時間
5 REV Plate Dk2 レーバー 時間
6 REV Vocal ホーバーブボ 時間
7 REV Vocal Big ホーバーブボル大 時間
8 REV Vox Warm ホーバーブボ 時間
9 REV Strings ホーバー 時間
10 REV Lg Brass ホーバーホー 時間
11 REV Vox Air バーブボルエ 時間
12 REV Vox Club ームバーブボ 時間
13 REV Snare ルーバー 時間
14 REV Ac Guitar ームバー 時間
15 REV Sm Brass ルー
バー 時間
16 ENH Tube ハンブデ
17 ENH Vocal 1 ボールエハン Vox
18 ENH Vocal 2 ボールエンハ Vox
19 DLY Double ブル 時間
20 DLY Slap プバ 時間
21 DLY BRT 1 時間
22 DLY BRT 2 ピー 時間
23 DLY BRT 3 時間
24 DLY Dark 1 レイ 時間
25 DLY Dark 2 ダーピー 時間
26 DLY Dark 3 時間
27 CHO Deep Slow ハイレー
28 CHO Mod Wide レーレー
レー
29 CHO Shrt Wide レー レー
30 CHO Shrt Fast コー
31 CHO Deep Mod スハレーレー レー
エフェクト
12
13
14
押してパラメータ調節モードに
チャネルエフェクトコント
ロール
フットスイッチジャックをこ
こにセット(Peavey シング
ルボタンモメンタリスイッチ
03050680
押して全チャネルのエフェクトをミュート
ノブを回してエフェクトを検索し、ノブを押して"
イン"にしてエフェクトを選択
スかの再生
に述ディスをRCA ック CD
プレーヤー、レコードプレーヤー、テープマシンなどに使用するには、ジャック
うにを上しま 15)。力を使
かは、マスターセクションの画面に表示されます。再生、一時停止、順送り、逆
送りなどの機能を使用するには、ソースデバイスのコントロールを使います。サ
ウンドを調節するには Escort ミキサーのチャネル 7 のコントロールを使います。
MP3 レーヤー、スマートフォンなどでメディアを再生するには、ボタンを上位
置にしてきます。に述べた 3.5 mm ステオケーブを使って続し、ソ
スデバイスを使って再生状態を調節します。3.5 mm ジャックにデバイスが接続さ
れているとき、RCA ャックは自動的にオフになります。MP3 やオーディオファ
イル
USB メモリスティックから再生するには、USB プラグがオンになるようボ
タンを下位置(図 16)にしておきます。
: Escort では、複数のメディア入力を通して同時に再生することはできません。
USB デバイスを接続した状態で、「メディア選択」ノブ(図 17)を使い、オーデ
ィオファイルを検索します。目的のファイルが画面に表示されたら、「メディア
選択」ノブを押してファイルを選択します。再生、一時停止、順送り、逆送りな
どの機能を使用するには、ミキサーのコントロールを使います。ファイルの検索
や選択をしない場合、Escort USB メモリデバイスに保存された順序でファイル
を再生します。
検索時にはオーディオ以外のファイルも表示されますが、選択してもオーディオ
は再生されません。再生のために選択できるのはオーディオファイルだけです。
ポールの
.WAV
.MP3
.
WMA
メディア
16
17
15
ソースデバイスのRCAジャックをここにセット
ソースデバイスの3.5 mmステレ
オジャックをここにセット
ボタンを押して""位置にして
RCA/3.5 mmジャックをオンにする
USBメモリデバイスをここにセット
ノブでメディアファイルを検索。ノブを押し
"イン"にして再生するファイルを選択
コントロールを使って
「再生」「一時停止」「順送り」「逆送り」
USBボタンを押して"イン"にしてUSBを使用
Graphic Equalizer の使用
各チャンネルの HIGHMID-MORPHLOW コントロールは、それぞれの入力信号の
トーンを調節するだですが、7バンドグフィックコライザ、パワーミキ
サーの中を通るすべての信号のトーナルバランスを調節します。このグラフィック
イコライザはまた、ハウリング(アコースティックフィードバック)をなくすある
いは少なくするためにも使用できます。これにより、サウンドを柔軟に調節できる
ようになりますが、過度な調節は避けてください。
FLS
®
Feedback Locating System
FLS(フィードバックロケーティングシステム)LED インジケータは、ハウリングを
なくすあるいは少なくする上で重要なツールです。ハウリングは、スピーカーから
音がマイクに再び入る結果、サウンドシステムから聞こえるキーンという大きな軋
音です。FLS 機能を使用するには
、最初にグラフィックEQ のスライダー(図 18)を
すべ 0 にセットします。次に、オーディエンスが来る前に、ハウリングが起こるま
で「マスターレベル」や「チャネルレベル」を上げます。どの LED が点灯するか確認
し、対応するスライダーを少し下げます。これによりハウリング周波数でのゲイン
下がり、この操作を必要に応じて繰り返すことで、ハウリングが起きる前にゲイン
改善できます。ただし、音質を損なうことのないように、スライダーは少しずつ調
ます
イコライゼーション
ハウリングを避ける
ハウリングを扱う上で最適な方法は、イコライゼーショ (EQ) の調節で済ませる前に、システムのマイクとスピーカーの配置を調べ
ることです。音がオーディエンスの方に向けられ、マイクから離れるようにスピーカーが配置されているか確認します。マイクは、で
きるだけ音源に近づけて配置します。マイクを近づけると、ゲインを上げる必要がなく、システムの音量が大きくなります。
マイクの使用に関するガイドライン
可能なら、マイクは1本にするほうがいいです。マイクを増やすと、スピーカーから拾う音が多くなり、ハウリングを防ぐために各マ
イクを下げなければならなくなります。ただし、マイクを持つ各人のレベルのバランスをとるのが難しい場合、あるいは十分なゲイン
が得られない場合、マイクを増やすのはメリットがあります。たとえば、シンガーそれぞれにマイクを持たせれば、各シンガーにかな
り近づけてマイクを配置できます。
これはマイク側の音量を上げることになり、複数のマイクを使用するデメリットをかなり相殺でき
ます。また、各マイクのボリュームを個別に調節して適切なバランスをとることができます。
Escort
®
のパッキング
Escort ットは少なくありサウンドシステム簡単に移動できる中に収容できるこ1です
(図 19。まず、スピーカースタンドを折り畳み、次に、2のストラップで収容ボックスに収めます。オプションのマイクを収容ボッ
クスに入れ、他のボックスにケーブルを入れるか、スピーカースタンドとともに収容します。スピーカーを、表面を下に向けてボトム
トレイの上に置き、4つのラッチを固定します。Escort はこれで搬送でき、また、スーツケーススタイルの車輪で移動することもできま
す。
19
使用のヒント
18
「ゼロ」ポイントのEQスライダー
オプション
警告: 安全のため、ミキサースタンドは完全に開き、安定した平らな面に置いてください。
20
21
22
オプションの付属品(Peavey ディーラーから入手可)
マイクスタンドブーム付き三脚マイクスタンド (00722910)
マイク、ケーブル - PVi
®
2 マイク、ケーブル付属 (00496360)
マイク用ウィンドスクリーン黒ウィンドスクリーン (00069100)
スピーカーケーブル(長さ各種)- 25' 16 AWG (00060450)
スピーカーケーブル(サイズ各種)- 黒スピーカースタンド (00722890)
CD プレーヤー、レコードプレーヤー、テープマシン、MP3 プレーヤー/スマートフォン用オーディオケーブル
オプションのミキサースタンドアセンブリ (00496340)
ミキサースタンドをケースから取り出します。ミキサースタンドは3のパーツから成っています。脚2とスタンドクロスメン
す(図 20。図のように、脚ソケットを合わせてスタンドクロスメンバを持ちます(図
21)。一方のレッグペアをクロスメンバに完
全に差し込みます(図 22。クロスメンバを合わせて持ったまま、床面で脚をセットし、もう一方のレッグペアを差し込みます。ス
タンドを移動する場合は、脚を持って折り畳んで運びます。
20 21 22
Escort
®
3000 仕様
出力: 80 ワット RMS (各チャネル)
周波数応答: 40 Hz 20 kHz (+/-3 dB)
過負荷保護: DDT™ 10 dB PA 出力を制限し、スピーカーの
破損につながるクリッピングを防止
歪み: 最大出力で 0.2% THD 未満
信号対ノイズ比: 88 dB マイク入力、標準
AC 電源: 115 V AC 60 Hz または
230 V AC 50/60 Hz
総重量:
(スタンド含む)
50 lbs. (22.67 kg)
寸法: 14.5" H x 36.75" W x 15.5" D
(36.8 cm x 93.3 cm x 39.4 cm)
スピーカー: ウーファー 10" (254 mm)
ピエゾホーンツイーター
Escort
®
3000
問題 確認 処置
音が出ない
LCD が点灯しない)
電源スイッチは入っていますか?
ライは電センされ
ていますか?
電源スイッチを入れ、電源コードをコンセントに接続し
ます。
音がしない
LCD が点灯しない)
「マ、「ルゲコン
トロールは上がっていますか?
「マスター」、「チャネルレベル」両方のコントロール
を必要なレベルまで上げます。スピーカー接続を確認し
ます。マイクスイッチを入れます。マイクまたは音源の
接続を確認します。
エフェクトがない チャネルの EFX コントロールは上がっていま
すか
マスターの「EFX ュート」はオンですか
メニフェ選択ます
か?
マスターエフェクトメニューでエフェクトが選択されて
いることを確認します。マスター「EFX ミュート」をチ
ェックします。LED が点灯していれば「EFX ミュート」
はオンです。オフにするには「EFX
ミュート」ボタンを1
回押します。オーディオエフェクトが聞こえるまでチャ
ネルの EFX コントロールを調節します。
USB メモリデバイスのファ
イルが再生されない
再生するファイルは選択されていますか?
オーァイ応フトで
すか?
「メディア選択」ノブを回してファイルが表示され、次
るこ
す。オーディオファイルのフォーマットが正しいか確認
します。本書で先に述べたサポートされるオーディオフ
ォーマットのリストを参照してください。
らの
ンと
大きい
「チまたスタ」の
コンが下いるがし
ない場合はハウリングです。
マイクのゲインを小さくします。マイクをスピーカーの
後ろまたはスピーカーからさらに離して配置します。EQ
FLS ランプをチェックし、スライダーのレベルを下げ
ます。
音が歪む チャン」り高
いますか?
「チャネルゲイン」を下げ、「マスターボリューム」を
上げます
고객 여러분! 세계 최고의 휴대용 PA 시스템을 구입해 주셔서 감사합니다. Escort 통합된 설계를 통해 휴대가 간편하면서도 사용자가
쉽게 제어하고 조작할 있어 학교, 교회, 단체는 물론 DJ 소규모 뮤지컬 그룹 등에 매우 유용한 제품입니다. Escort에는 7 채널을
사용 , DJ 적인 되는 커가 재되 있습. 에는
옵션에 필요한 개의 입력을 가진 디어 널은 디지 이펙트부, 풋스위 방식 이펙트 디피트, FLS
®
(FeedBack Locating
System) 기능을 내장한 마스터 7밴드 그래픽 EQ 등과 같은 전문 음향 기능이 탑재되어 있습니다. 휴대용 케이스에는 마이크, 케이블
기어(옵션) 필요한 액세서리들을 수납할 있는 공간이 있습니다. Escort 케이스에는 스피커 설치용 래치, 다목적 운반용 다중 핸들
간편한 휴대용 휠이 들어 있습니다. 설명서를 주의 깊게 읽고 숙지한 다음 최신 Peavey Escort 3000 뛰어난 사운드를 경험해 보시기
바랍니다.
휴대용 Pro 오디오 시스템
기능:
가방 형태의 휠로 편리한 패키지
10" 우퍼 압전 내장 투웨이 스피커 시스템
7밴드 파워 믹서
USB MP3 재생
고음질 디지털 이펙트
6x XLR - 1/4" 콤비네이션 입력
스테레오 RCA, 3.5mm 미디어 재생용 USB 미디어 입력
7밴드 그래픽 EQ(FLS 내장)
접이식 스피커 스탠드 2
2x 15' 스피커 케이블
마이크, 케이블 등의 액세서리 보관
풋스위치 방식 이펙트 디피트
PV 마이크 케이블*
믹서 스탠드*
* 옵션 기능을 의미합니다. 기능은 특정 모델에서 사용할 있습니다
Escort
®
3000
한국어
Escort
®
부분 다른 사운 하며 많은 부분 로도 충분 . 전을
최우선으 려해 니다. 반드 센트 3 확장 코드 용하십시. 운드 시스 이블 끄러 사고 생하
않도록 테이프로 한데 묶어 두십시오. 스피커 스탠드와 믹서는 튼튼한 평면에 설치하십시오. 설멍서에 기재된 지침을 따르면 부상이나 장비
손상을 방지할 있으며 장기간 최상의 상태로 사용할 있습니다.
안전이 가장 중요합니다!
설치 방법
믹서 스피커 설치
장치를 바닥에 놓고 스피커를 위에 올려 놓습니다. 래치를 끝까지 들어올려 풉니다. 케이스에서 스피커를 제거합니다.
참고: 스피커를 제거한 래치를 잠글 있습니다. 이는 다른 소스를 제거할 방해가 되지 않도록 하는 방법입니다. 또한 래치 손상을 방지하는 역할도
합니다. 래치를 케이스측과 높이가 같아질 때까지 안쪽으로 밀어 래치를 닫은 다음 아래로 밀어 잠급니다.
케이스에서 스피커 스탠드를 제거합니다. 스피커가 안정된 자세로 평면에 놓일 있도록 스탠드 다리를 완전히 줍니다. 베이스에 있는 나비 나사를
너무 세게 조이지 말고 맞게 조입니다(그림 1). 스피커 스탠드를 원하는 높이까지 올리고 나비 나사를 조인 다음 안전 핀을 끼웁니다(그림 2).
경고! 서에 드시 Escort 커만 십시. Escort
스피커 사용하 기기가 손상될 있습니다.
스피커를 스탠드에 놓은 다음 스피커 앞면을 관객쪽으로 향하게 하고 마이크와 멀리 떨어진 위치에 둡니다(그림 3). 스피커 앞면 하단에 스피커 케이블
잭을 믹서 뒷면에 있는 스피커 출력에 연결합니다. 왼쪽 스피커를 LEFT OUTPUT 연결하고 오른쪽 스피커는 RIGHT OUTPUT 연결합니다(그림 4).
그림 3
그림 4
그림 1
그림 2
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
또는
스피커 삽입
전원 연결
경고! 전원을 연결하기 전원 스위치가 OFF 위치에 있는지
확인하십시오.
미디 기기 연결
Escort 믹서 다양 디어 장치 함께 니다. CD 이어 접지
턴테이블을 연결할 경우에는 CHANNEL 7 RCA 좌우 연결부를 사용하십시오. MP3 플레이어나
미디 레이어가 설치 마트폰을 연결할 우에는 3.5mm 테레 넥터 용하십시오.
3.5mm 레오 (03007820) 니다. 까운 Peavey
대리점에 구입 있습니다. MP3 디오 파일이 저장 USB 메모리 장치 용할
때에는 USB 치를 CHANNEL 7 USB 커넥터에 끼운 다음 마스터부에 있는 화면과 컨트롤을
사용 오디오 파일
탐색하고 재생하십시( 7).
IEC 전원 코드를 기기의 후면 패널에 있는 소켓에 끼운 다음 (그림 8) 적당한 전기
콘센트에 연결하십시오. 연장 코드가 필요할 경우에는 반드시 접지 상태가 안전하
유지될 있도록 정상 접지 핀이 연결된 3 코드를 사용해야 합니다.
NOTE: FOR UK ONLY
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond
with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
(1) The wire that is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal
that is marked by the letter E, or by the Earth symbol, or coloured green or green and
yellow. (2) The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that is
marked with the letter N, or the colour black. (3) The wire that is coloured brown must
be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L, or the colour red.
마이크 또는 라인 출력 연결
Escort 파워 믹서는 Peavey PV
®
i 마이크 시리즈와 같은 우수한 음질과 사운드 밸런스, 다이내믹한 사운드를 구현하는 마이크를 사용할 있도록
. XLR(3) ( 5). 이크
무대에서 사용하는 순서대로 연결하십시오. 키보드 같은 라인 레벨 장치를 연결할 경우에는 1/4" 악기 케이블을 사용해 XLR-1/4" 콤보 커넥터 중앙에
끼우십시오(그림 6).
그림 6
그림 5
전원 코드를 여기에 꽂으십시오
그림 7
그림 8
버튼을 누르면 USB 활성화됩니다
USB 장치 삽입
노브를 사용해 미디어 파일을 찾을
있습니다
컨트롤 설정 장치 켜기
전원 켜기 피커, 마이 하십.
12 향으
( ). ON/OFF ON
두십시오(그림 9).
게인 볼륨 컨트롤 조정
파워 믹서와 스피커의 최적 설정은 MASTER LEVEL 컨트롤에 시되어 있습니다(그림 10).
CHANNEL LEVEL 컨트 하는 륨으 조정하십시오(그림 11). CHANNEL LEVEL
처음 위치 하나로 돌려 원하는 볼륨에 맞추 MASTER LEVEL 래로 돌려 CHANNEL
LEVEL 위로 돌릴 있습니다. CHANNEL LEVEL 최대(max) 되고
MASTER LEVEL
올리면 CHANNEL LEVEL 내릴 있습니다. 이는 기본적인 믹서 기능과 동일합니다.
컨트롤 조정
액티 HIGH, MID-MORPH
®
LOW 컨트 정해 운드
니다( 11). 컨트 치게 하면 운드 곡이 생하거나
마이크 입력에 대한 피드백이 증가할 있기 때문에 중간 정도로 조절하십시오.
HIGH
EQ (12kHz +/-15dB)
변화 음을 거하
있도록 설계되었습니다.
MID-MORPH
Mid-Morph
동합.
250Hz
차단 저하 . 쪽으 돌리
4kHz에서 증가되어 보컬에 명료도가 더해집니다. 어떤 방식이든 보컬이나 악기의
명료도가 향상됩니다.
LOW
베이스 주파수 레벨(80Hz에서 +/-15dB) 변화를 주는 쉘빙 입의 EQ니다.
EQ 운드
선명하게 해줍니다. 다른 EQ 마찬가지로 적게 사용해야 합니다. EQ 너무
많이 높이면 저음이 지나치게 커집니다.
기본 조작:
열린 원은 최적 범위를 나타냅니다
컨트롤
채널 레벨 컨트롤
그림 10
그림 9
그림 11
스위치를 오른쪽("on" 위치)으로 젖히십시오
이펙트 설정 조정
Escort .
EFFECTS SELECT 우로 MASTER
( 12).
시키시오. 미터 PARAMETER ADJUST
사용 가능한 파라미터 해당 조정값이 화면에 표시됩니(그림 12). 라미터를 조정하려면
EFFECTS SELECT 노브 좌우 펙트 면으 려면 PARAMETER
ADJUST EFFECTS SELECT .
들으려면 CHANNEL EFX 노브 왼쪽
리고 펙트 려면 브를 른쪽
( 13). EFX MUTE 튼을 널의
삭제됩니다(그림 12). 미디어 채널에는 이펙트가 없습니다.
풋스위치 방식 이펙트 디피트
Escort 위치 되어 . 용하
Peavey 버튼 (Momentary Single-Button Switch)(03050680)
싱글 버튼 풋스위치로 이펙트를 삭제할 있습니다. 순간 싱글 버튼 스위치는 가까운 Peavey
대리점에서 구입할 있습니다. 풋스위치의 1/4" 플러그를 Escort 믹서 후면에 있는 EFFECTS
DEFEAT 끼우십시( 14). 연결 료된 풋스위치 튼을
르면 EFX MUTE
전환됩니다(그림 12).
사용 가능한 이펙트 파라미터
온스크린 이름 이펙트 사용 가능한 파라미터
1 REV 플레이트 Br1 플레이트 리버브 브라이트 시간
2 REV 플레이트 Br2 플레이트 리버크 젠틀 로우 패스 시간
3 REV 플레이트 Med 플레이트 리버브 미디움 로우 패스 시간
4 REV 플레이트 Dk1 플레이트 리버브 하드 로우 패스 시간
5 REV 플레이트 Dk2 플레이트 리버브 다크 시간
6 REV 보컬 리버브 보컬l 시간
7 REV 보컬 Big 리버브 보컬 휴지 시간
8 REV Vox 리버브 보컬 글로우 시간
9 REV 스트링 리버브 스트링 시간
10 REV Lg 브라스 리버브 브라스 시간
11 REV Vox 에어 리버브 보컬 에어 시간
12 REV Vox 클럽 리버브 보컬 클럽 시간
13 REV 스네어
버브 스네어 로우 시간
14 REV Ac 기타 리버브 어쿠스틱 기타 시간
15 REV Sm 브라스 리버브 브라스 시간
16 ENH 튜브 인핸서 튜브 왜곡 밝기
17 ENH 보컬 1 보컬 인핸서 Vox 밝기
18 ENH 보컬 2 보컬 인핸서 Vox 미디움 밝기
19 DLY 더블 딜레이 더블 시간
20 DLY 슬랩 딜레이 슬랩백 시간
21 DLY BRT 1 딜레이 브라이트, 적은 반복 시간
22 DLY BRT 2 딜레이 브라이트, 많은 반복 시간
23 DLY BRT 3 딜레이 브라이트, 대부분 반복 시간
24 DLY 다크 1 딜레이 다크, 적은 반복 시간
25 DLY 다크 2 딜레이 다크, 많은 반복 시간
26 DLY 다크 3 딜레이 다크, 대부분 반복 시간
27 CHO 슬로우 코러스 깊이, 저속 속도
28 CHO 모드 와이드 코러스 중간 깊이, 넓은 속도 속도
29 CHO Sh
rt 와이드 코러스 짧은 깊이, 넓은 속도 속도
30 CHO Shrt 패스트 코러스 짧은 깊이, 고속 속도
31 CHO 모드 코러스 깊이, 중간 속도 속도
이펙트:
그림 12
그림 13
그림 14
버튼을 누르면 파라미터 조정 모드로
전환됩니다
채널 이펙트 컨트롤
풋스위치 삽입
(Peavey 순간 단일 버튼 스위치
03050680)
버튼을 누르면 모든 채널의 이펙트가 소거됩니다
이펙트를 찾을 때에는 노브를 돌리고 이펙트를
선택하고 활성화하려면 노브를 누르십시오
미디어 소스에서 재생
미디 소스 치를 전에 명한 연결십시. CD 플레, 테이 또는
RCA
확인하십시오(그림 15). 활성화된 입력은 마스터부 화면에 표시됩니다. 재생, 중지, 앞으로/
뒤로 기능용 소스 장치의 컨트롤을 사용하십시오. 원하는 사운드를 얻으려면 Escort 믹서의
7 . MP3 ,
미디어 재생의 경우 버튼이 올라가 있는 상태에 있는지 확인하삽시오. 이전에 설명한 3.5mm
레오 이블 하고 롤용 하십.
3.5mm 잭에 연결되면 RCA 잭이 자동으로 비활성화됩니다. USB
모리 장치에서 MP3 또는
오디오 파일을 재생할 경우 버튼을 아래쪽으로 내리면 USB 플러그가 활성화됩니다(그림 16).
참고: Escort에서는 여러 미디어 입력을 동시에 재생할 없습니다.
USB M EDIA SELECT
용하십시( 17). 화면 표시 MEDIA SELECT 노브 눌러 일을
재생할 있습니. 믹서 재생, 일시정지, FWD/REV 컨트롤 사용하십시오. 파일을
색하거나 하지 Escort USB 메모 치에 순서 파일 생합니다.
오디 파일 아닌 일은 시만 재생되지 않습. 디오 일만 생용으로
선택할 있습니다.
지원되는 오디오 파일 유형
.WAV
.
MP3
.WMA
미디어:
그림 16
그림 17
그림 15
소스 장치의 RCA 삽입
소스 장치의 3.5mm 스테레오
삽입
버튼을 “상승” 위치가
때까지 눌러RCA/3.5mm 잭을
활성화합니다
USB메모리 장치 삽입
노브를 돌려 미디어 파일을 찾습니다.
노브를 눌러 파잉을 재생합니다
재생, 일지 정지,
FWD/REV 컨트롤용으로 사용합니다
버튼을 눌러 USB 활성화합니다
Graphic Equalizer 사용
채널 HIGH, MID-MORPH LOW 컨트롤은 입력 신호 톤만 조정하지만, 7
그래픽 EQ 파워 믹서를 통해 전해지는 모든 신호의 밸런스를 조정합니다. 그래픽 EQ
또한 어쿠스틱 피드백을 줄여주는 강력한 도구입니다. 기능을 사용해 사운드를 원하는 대로
조정할 있지만 조정할 때에는 중간을 사용하십시오.
FLS
®
FeedBack Locating System
FLS (FeedBack Locating System) LED 요한
.
퀼링 . FLS EQ
슬라
이더를 0으로 설정한 시작하십시오(그림 18). 그런 다음 연주를 시작하기 전에 피드백이
발생할 때까지 MASTER LEVEL /또는 CHANNEL LEVEL 올리십시오. LED 불빛이 켜지면
해당 이더 천히 시오. 렇게 드백 수의 어들 요한
경우 백이 하기 .
역효과가 있으므로 슬라이더는 조금만 조정하십시오.
EQ:
어쿠스틱 피드백 없애기
피드백이 발생하면 EQ 조정을 복원하기 전에 먼저 시스템의 마이크와 스피커 위치를 점검하는 것이 좋습니. 스피커에서 나오 사운드가 관객을
향해 있고 마이크와 멀리 떨어져 있는지 확인하십시오. 마이크는 가능한 사운드 소스와 가깝게 설치하십시오. 마이크를 가깝게 설치하면 게인을
높이지 않고도 시스템을 통해 전해지는 사운드 볼륨이 높아집니다.
마이크 사용 가이드라인
연주 시에는 마이크 하나만 사용하는 것이 좋습니다. 마이크를 2 이상 사용할 경우에는 스피커에서 사운드를 크게 내고 마이크는 볼륨을 줄여
피드 하지 도록 줄여 합니. , 이크 나씩 용하 균형 잡기 거나 인을 하는
경우에는 마이크를 추가로 사용할
있습니다. 예를 들어, 명의 싱어가 각자 마이크를 사용할 마이크의 위치는 싱어와 가까운 상태가 됩니다.
이렇 하면 크의 운드 륨이 이크 사용 보다 않은 향이 큽니. 각의 이크 볼륨 당한
밸런스로 조정할 있습니다.
Escort
®
운반
Escort 가진 많은 장점 하나는 전체 사운드 시스템을 운반 케이스에 넣어 가지고 다닐 있다는 점입니다(그림 19). 스피커 스탠드를 접어 2개의
끈으로 보관 케이스에 넣고 묶습니다. 보관 칸에 옵션 마이크 넣고 다른 칸에 케이블을 넣거나 스피커 스탠드와 함께 넣습니. 스피커 앞면을 바닥
트레이 아래로 향하도록 넣고 래치 4개를 잠급니다. 이제 Escort 가지고 다니거나 가방 형태의
내장 휠을 빼내 끌고 다닐 있습니다.
그림 19
일반 사용 :
그림 19
그림 18
EQ 슬라이더(0 위치)
옵션:
경고:
안전을 위해 믹서 스탠드를 완전히 열고 안정된 평면에 놓으십시오.
그림 20
그림 21
그림 22
옵션 액세서리 (가까운 Peavey 대리점에서 구입 가능)
마이크 스탠드걸침대가 있는 마이크 삼각 스탠드 (00722910)
추가 마이크 케이블 - PVi
®
케이블 연결 마이크 2 (00496360)
마이크 윈드 스크린블랙 윈드 스크린 (00069100)
다양한 길이의 추가 스피커 케이블 - 25' 16 AWG (00060450)
다양한 크기의 추가 스피커 스탠드블랙 스피커 스탠드 (00722890)
CD 플레이어, 턴테이블, 테잎 재생 장치 또는 MP3 플레이어/스마트폰 연결용 오디오 케이블
옵션 믹서 스탠드 액세서리(00496340)
케이스에 믹서 탠드 합니. 탠드 3 (다리 2 탠드 로스 )으로 성되 니다( 20). 탠드 로스
멤버와 다리
함께 잡습니( 21). 한쪽 크로 멤버 전히 웁니다(그림 22). 크로 멤버 계속 잡고 상태에서 리를
바닥에 설치하고 나머지 다리 개를 끼웁니다. 스탠드를 옮길 때에는 다리를 잡고 스탠드를 접은 다음 옮기십시오.
그림 20 그림 21 그림 22
Escort
®
3000 규격:
출력: 80 W RMS(채널당)
주파수 응답: 40Hz ~ 20kHz +/-3dB
과부하 보호: DDT™ 10dB PA 출력을 없애 스피커에 손상을 있는 클립 현상 방지
왜곡: 0.2% THD @ Max power 이하
신호/잡음비: 88dB 마이크 출력(일반)
AC 전원: 115 V AC 60Hz 또는
230 V AC 50/60Hz
조립 중량:
(스탠드 포함)
50 lbs. (22.67 kg)
치수: 14.5"(높이) x 36.75"(너비) x 15.5"(깊이)
(36.8 cm x 93.3 cm x 39.4 cm)
스피커: 우퍼 10" (254mm)
압전 트위터
Escort
®
3000 문제 해결
문제 점검 사항 대책
소리가 들리지 않음
(LCD 켜지지 않음)
전원 스위치가 켜져 있는지 확인?
전기가 공급되고 있는 전원 콘센트에 라인 코드
연결했지 확인?
전원 스위치를 켜고 전원 코드를 콘센트에 연결하십시오.
소리가 들리지 않음
(LCD 켜지지 않음)
마스터 채널 게인 컨트롤이 올라가는지 확인
합니다?
마스터 채널 레벨 컨트롤을 올려 원하는 레벨로 조정하십시오.
스피커 연결 상태를 확인하십시오. 마이크 스위치를 켜십시오.
이크 또는 사운드 소스 연결 상태를 확인하십시오.
이펙트가 들리지 않음 채널 EFX 컨트롤이 튠업되어 있는지 확인?
마스터 EFX MUTE 사용 중인지 확인?
메뉴에서 이펙트를 활성화했는지 확인?
마스터 이펙트 메뉴에서 원하는 이펙트를 선택했는지 확인하십시
. 마스터 EFX MUTE 확인하십
시오. LED 켜지면 EFX MUTE
기능이 활성화됩니다. EFX MUTE 기능을 사용하지 않으려면 EFX
MUTE 버튼을 누르십시오. 오디오 이펙트가 들릴 때까지
채널 EFX 컨트롤을 조정하십시오.
USB 메모리 장치에 있는 파일이
재생되지 않음
파일이 재생되지 않는지 확인?
오디오 파일 형식이 올바른지 확인?
MEDIA SELECT 노브를 돌려 원하는 파일이 표시되고 노브를 누르
파일이 재생되는지 확인하십시오. 오디오 파일 형식이 올바른
확인하십시오. 설명서 전반부에 설명한 지원 가능한 오디오
형식 목록을 참조하십시오.
스피커에서 하울링 또는 스퀼링
현상
채널 또는 마스터 레벨 컨트롤을 줄일 현상
사라지면 어쿠스틱 피드백입니다.
마이크 게인을 줄이십시오. 마이크를 스피커 또는 스피커와
설치하십시오. EQ위의 FLS 불빛을 관찰하고 해당 슬라이더의
레벨을 줄이십시오.
사운드 왜곡 채널 게인이 너무 높게 설정되어 있는지 확인합
니다?
채널 게인을 줄이고 마스터 볼륨을 높이십시오
祝贺您!您刚刚购买了世界上最优秀的便携式功放系统。Escort 的综合设计在方便运输的同时,兼顾控件的操作简便,是学
校、教堂、民间团体以及DJ和小型乐队的上上之选。Escort 配备了由七通道有源调音台驱动的双路双扬声器,非常适合于
乐、音乐和 DJ 用途。调音台包括一个带有多路输入的媒体通道,用于多种播放选择,并且拥有比如数字效果段、可用
板开关控制的效果抑制、 FLS
®
(反馈定位系统)的七段主音量图形均衡器等专业功能。便携箱为话筒、电缆以及其他有
可能需要的配件提供了额外的储藏空间。Escort 的箱体上配有扬声器安装锁扣,有多个把手,便利多种携带方式,并带有滚
轮,方便运输。请仔细阅读说明,尽情享受您崭新的 Peavey(百威)Escort 3000
便携式功放系统
功能:
带行李箱型滚轮的便利包装箱
10" 低音扬声器和压电高音扬声器的双路扬声器系统
七通道有源调音台
U
SB MP3 播放
高品质的数字效果
6x XLR - 1/4" 组合输入
立体声 RCA3.5 mm、和 USB 媒体输入,用于媒体播放
FLS(反馈定位系统)的七段图形均衡器
两个折叠式扬声器支架
2x 15' 扬声器电缆
用于话筒、电缆等物件的储藏格
可用脚踏开关控制的效果抑制
PV 话筒和电缆*
调音台支架*
* 代表可选功能,适用于某些型号
Escort
®
3000
中文
Escort
®
的安装和其它音响系统的设置大同小异,许多方面都需要用到最普通的常识。安全永远是您要首关注的事情。切记
要使用带地线的电源插座和三相延长线。音响系统的电缆布线要防止绊跌,如有必要,用胶带将其粘在地上。扬声器和调音台
的支架要置放在结实平整的表平面上。遵守这些准则有助于防范人身伤害和设备损伤,确保年久日长的无故障使用。
安全第一!
安装指南
设置调音台和扬声器
置放锁闭的设备套装使扬声器朝上,拉起锁扣,直至锁扣松脱,从箱内取出扬声器。
注意:锁扣在扬声器取出后可以再扣紧,我们建议您这么做,以防止在取出其它组件时碍手碍脚,同时也有助于防止锁扣受损。关闭锁扣
时将其推至和箱侧齐平,然后向下按压,直至锁住。
从箱内取出扬声器支架。务必要将支架腿完全撑开,确保为扬声器提供稳定的支承,将支架置放在平整的表平面上。拧紧底座上的指旋螺
钉,但不要拧得过紧(见图 1)。将扬声器支架升至所要的高度,拧紧指旋螺钉,并按图示装上安全销(见图 2)。
警告!只可将附带的扬声器连接到调音台上Escort 扬声器为有源
调音台提供了最佳的负载,使用其它扬声器可能导致设备损坏。
将扬声器放置在支架上,扬声器的安放位置要面对听众,并远离话筒(见 3。用扬声器电缆将扬声器正面底部的插孔连接到调音台背
面的扬声器输出上,左扬声器连接到左输出上,右扬声器连接到右输出上(见图4)。
3
4
1
2
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
7
The FLS
®
(Feedback Locating System) LED indicators are invaluable tools in helping to reduce/eliminate feedback. To
use the FLS feature, start by setting all graphic EQ sliders (Fig. 9) to 0. Then, before the audience arrives, increase the
MASTER VOLUME and/or CHANNEL GAIN until feedback occurs. Note which LED illuminates and slightly lower
the corresponding slider. This reduces the gain at the feedback frequency, and can be repeated if necessary to improve
gain before feedback. However, only lower the sliders in small amounts to avoid adversely affecting sound quality.
Fig. 9
Avoiding Acoustic Feedback
Acoustic feedback is the loud howl or squealing sound heard through sound systems as the result of sound from the
speakers re-entering the microphones. Although it does an excellent job of getting the audience’s attention, feedback
should be avoided. When trying to deal with acoustic feedback it is always best to start looking at the placement of the
mics and speakers in the system before resorting to equalization (EQ) adjustment. Make sure that the speakers are
positioned to direct the sound toward the audience and away from the microphones. Position mics as close to the sound
source as reasonable. Moving the mic closer increases the volume of the sound through the system without having to
turn up the gain.
Microphone Usage Guidelines
When practical, a single microphone is preferred. Additional microphones pick up more sound from the speakers and
each mic has to be turned down a little to prevent feedback. However, if you have difficulty balancing the level of
different individuals with one mic, or if you still cannot get sufficient gain, using more mics can offer an advantage.
Giving several singers their own microphones, for example, allows placement of the microphones much closer to each
singer. This increases the volume of the sound at the mic and far outweighs any detrimental effect from using multiple
mics. It also allows the volume of each mic to be adjusted separately for proper balance.
Reverb
Adding reverberation to music can enhance the sound of that music. To add reverb to a microphone, simply turn up the
REVERB control (Fig. 7) on the appropriate input channel. Add reverb in moderation because too much reverb makes
vocals hard to understand. In most cases, it is best not to add reverb to the spoken word.
Stereo / Mono Operation
The Escort
2000 powered mixer has two input channels (4 & 5) for stereo line sources. If the speakers are situated so
that most of the audience can hear both speakers (Fig. 10 A), it can be advantageous to run the system in stereo. If the
audience primarily hears just one speaker (Fig. 10 B), or if you are using one speaker for the audience and the other for
the stage performers, then it is best to run the system in mono.
Fig. 10
Stereo
Mono
Stereo
Mono
A B
将扬声器插孔插入这里
连接电源
警告!在连接电源前,务必确认电源开关处 OFF关)
的位置。
连接媒体播放音源
Escort 有源调音台接受各种各样的媒体播放设备。使用通道 7 RCA /右连接器连接
CD 播放器或接地的电唱机。用 3.5 mm 立体声连接器连接 MP3 放器或带媒体播放的
智能手机。这需要一条 3.5 mm 的立体声连接线 (03007820),可以在当地 Peavey(百
威)经销商那里找到。在使用带MP3或其它音频文件存储的 USB 盘时,将优盘插入
7 USB 连接器内,用显示屏和主控部分的控制钮操控并播放音频文件(见图 7
先将 IEC 电源线连接到图示中设备背面板上的插座(见图 8),然后连接
到适当的电源插座上。如果需要延长线,请确认是带有完好地脚的三相
线,保证接地安全。
NOTE: FOR UK ONLY
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond
with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
(1) The wire that is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal
that is marked by the letter E, or by the Earth symbol, or coloured green or green and
yellow. (2) The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that is
marked with the letter N, or the colour black. (3) The wire that is coloured brown must
be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L, or the colour red.
连接话筒或线路输入
Escort有源调音台专门设计用于和其它优质平衡的动态话筒或电容式话筒,比如 Peavey百威)的 PV
®
i 系列话筒相匹配。如图所示,
将话筒连接到 XLR(三芯)输入连接器上(见图 5)。如果使用多个话筒,将它们按出场顺序连接,以便逐个调整。如要连接键盘那样
线路电平设备,请使用 1/4" 乐器电缆,按图示将其插入 XLR-1/4" 组合连接器的中心(见图 6)。
6
5
在此插入电源线
7
8
按“下”按键启动 USB 优盘
在此插入 USB 优盘
用旋钮浏览媒体文件
设置控制,开启设备
打开电源前,请确定所有的扬声器、话筒和其他输入设备已连接妥善。将主控部分
的控制设定在 12 点钟位置,其控制全关闭到(向左完全旋)。将位于调
台背面(见图 9)的 ON/OFF 开关置放在 ON 的位置接通电源。
调整增益和音量控制
有源调音台和附带扬声器的最佳设置标识在 MASTER LEVEL 控制上(见图 10)。调
整通道电平控制(见图 11)直至达到预期的音量。如果通道电平在旋低到前三个位
置时就达到了预期的音量,调低主电平,以便您能调高通道电平。要是在通道电平
接近上限时才达到预期音量,那就要提高主电平,这样您才能调低通道电平。这与
任何调音台的基本功能完全相同。
调整音调控制
每个启用的通道都要调整 HIGHMID-MORPH
®
LOW 控制来达到预期的音响(见
11)。调整要缓和适度,任意一个控制设置过高都会导致音响失真,增加话筒输
入反馈的几率。
HIGH
这一主动音调控制高端均衡器的坡式波形随高音频率而变化(12 千赫时为
+/- 15 dB),旨在消除噪音,或根据音源的质量,为信号增加鲜明度。
MID-MORPH
大部分中音控制仅在一个频率工作,而 Mid-Morph 则是两个频率。向左旋
转时在 250 赫兹截波,以减少造成声音混浊的频率。向右转动时在 4 千赫
处提高增益,给声乐增加清晰度。无论哪一种方式,都能改善声乐或乐器
的清晰度。
LOW
均衡器的坡形波形随低音频率电平而变化80 赫兹时为 +/- 15 dB)。
端均衡器为细薄的音频信号增加深度,或清理混浊信号。和任何均衡器一
样,要谨慎使用。均衡器用得太过会给底端带来轰鸣声。
基本操作:
空心圆圈表示最佳范围
音调控制
通道电平控制
10
9
11
将开关翻转到右侧“开”的位置
调整效果设置
Escort 配备有内置数字效果。这些效果可以在主控段上选择,向左或向右旋转效果选
择旋,直所要效果示在示屏(见 12)一旦要的效果显示上显
按下钮选启用效果要调效果数,需按调整键(
12),可用的参数及其调整就会在显示屏上显示。向左或向右旋转效果选择旋钮调
整参数,然后按参数调整键或效果选择钮返回效果选择屏。想在任何指定通道上试听
效果的多寡,只要向左旋转 CHANNEL EFX 旋钮减少听到的效果,向右增加听到的效果
(见图 13)。主控段上的 EFX MUTE 按键(见图 12)能静音所有通道上的效果。媒体
通道上不带效果。
可用脚踏开关控制的效果抑制
您的 Escort个可控制。使使用 Peavey
威)瞬时键开 (03050680) 样的单键踏开关静所有通道的效果,可以
在当地
Peavey(百威)经销商那里购买到这种开关。将来自脚踏开关的 1/4" 插头
插入位于 Escort 调音台背面的效果抑制插孔(见图 14),接上以后,按脚踏开关的按
键切换 EFX MUTE(见图 12)。
可用的效果和参数
屏显名称 效果 可用参数
1 REV Plate Br1 明亮的金属板混响 时间
2 REV Plate Br2 柔和的低通金属板混响 时间
3 REV Plate Med 中度的低通金属板混响 时间
4 REV Plate Dk1 刚硬的低通金属板混响 时间
5 REV Plate Dk2 暗色的金属板混响 时间
6 REV Vocal 人声大厅混响 时间
7 REV Vocal Big 巨大的人声大厅混响 时间
8 REV Vox Warm 辉光的人声大厅混响 时间
9 REV Strings 弦乐大厅混响 时间
10 REV Lg Brass 铜管乐大厅的大厅混响 时间
11 REV Vox Air 缭绕的人声房间混响 时间
12 R
EV Vox Club 俱乐部人声房间混响 时间
13 REV Snare 低声小军鼓房间混响 时间
14 REV Ac Guitar 木吉他房间混响 时间
15 REV Sm Brass 铜管乐房间混响 时间
16 ENH Tube 电子管失真增强 亮度
17 ENH Vocal 1 人声声乐增强 亮度
18 ENH Vocal 2 中度人声声乐增强 亮度
19 DLY Double 延时倍增 时间
20 DLY Slap 延时回响 时间
21 DLY BRT 1 明亮延迟,少量重复 时间
22 DLY BRT 2 明亮延迟,较多重复 时间
23 DLY BRT 3 明亮延迟,最多重复 时间
24 DLY Dark 1 暗色延迟,少量重复 时间
25 DLY Dark 2 暗色延迟,较多重复 时间
26 DLY Dark 3 暗色延迟,最多重复 时间
27 CHO Deep Slow 高深度合唱,低速率 速率
28 CHO Mod Wide 中等深度合唱,宽速率 速率
29 CHO Sh
rt Wide 短深度合唱,宽速率 速率
30 CHO Shrt Fast 短深度合唱,高速率 速率
31 CHO Deep Mod 高深度合唱,中等速率 速率
效果:
12
13
14
按下按键进入参数调整模式
通道效果控制
在此插入脚踏开关插头
(百威瞬时单键开关 03050680
按下按键,静音所有通道的效果
旋转旋钮寻找效果,将旋钮按“入”选择和
启用效果
媒体音源播放
如前文所述,连接上您的媒体音源设备。使 RCA 孔连接 CD 播放器、录放器或
定按升起置,插孔活( 15
哪个上的
停止快进和倒退功能 Escort 调音上的通道7控制整预期的音。使用
MP3 、智或其似的,要键处起的。如
述,用立 3.5 mm 连接线进行连接并使用音设备的播控制。如有设
连接到 3.5 mm 插孔,则 RCA 插孔被自动禁用。要是播放 USB 优盘上的 MP3 或音频
文件,请确认按键处于“按下”的位置(见图 16),这样 USB 插座才会被激活。
注意:Escort 不允许用多种媒体输入同时播放。
接上 USB 备后使用媒择旋(见 17)导的音件。旦所
文件显示在了显
屏上,按媒体选择旋钮选提该文件。用调音台上的控件来控制播
放、暂停、快进和倒退。如果您选择不用导航或挑选特定文件Escort 会按您 USB
优盘存储的文件顺序播放。
非音频文件也会在导航上显示,但即使选了也不会有音频播放。只能选择音频文件
播放。
支持的音频文件类型
.WAV
.MP3
.WMA
媒体:
16
17
15
在此插入来自音源设备的 RCA 插头
在此插入来自音源设备的
3.5 mm 立体声插头
按按键至“升起”位置,激活
RCA/3.5 mm 插孔
在此插入 USB 优盘
用旋钮浏览媒体文件,
按“下”旋钮提示播放文件
用于控制播放、
暂停、快进和倒退
按“下”按键启动 USB 优盘
使用 Graphic Equalizer
与各通道上仅用来调整其自有输入信号音调的 HIGH MID-MORPHLOW 控制不同,
七段图形均衡器调整所有通过有源调音台信号的音调平衡。这个图形均衡器还是一台
帮助减少和消除声响反馈的强大工具,在声音调整上为用户提供了很大的灵活性,而
且调整手段和缓适度。
FLS
®
Feedback Locating System
FLS(反馈定位系统)的 LED 示灯是帮助减少/消除反馈的宝贵工具。声反馈是因
声器的声音再进入话筒所造成的音响系统大声嚎叫或尖啸声。要使 FLS 功能,
将所有图形均衡器的推子设置到 0(见图 18),然后在听众没到之前,增加主电平和/
或通道电平直至反馈发生。注意哪个 LED 亮起,稍稍降低相应的推子,这会降低反馈
频率的增益,如有必要,可以重复尝试来改善反馈前增益。只能少量调整推子,以
对音质产生不利影响。
均衡:
避免声反馈
如果遇到反馈,最好是先寻找系统中话筒和扬声器的置放位置,然后再求助于均 (EQ) 调整。切记扬声器的位置要将声音朝向听众,远
离话筒。话筒的位置要尽可能合理地靠近声源。移近话筒不需要调高增益就会增加系统的音量。
话筒使用指南
要是可能,最好使用单一话筒。额外的话筒会从扬声器拾取更多的声音,那样每个话筒就必须调低以避免反馈。但是,如果您用一个话筒
难以平衡不同人员的音量,或者您无法获得足够的增益,那么使用更多话筒就有优势。例如,给数位歌手自己的话筒会使话筒的位置更靠
近每位歌手,这会增加话筒的音量,这就远远胜过因使用多个话筒所能造成的任何不利影响,而且还允许各个话筒作单独音量调整,获得
适当平衡。
Escort
®
的装箱
Escort 诸多好处之一是能将整个音响系统装入其运输方便的箱子内(见图 19。首先是折叠起扬声器支架,然后用两条带子将它们固
定到储藏格内。将选配的话筒放进储藏格,将电缆放
进另一个储藏格内或和扬声器支架放在一起。将扬声器面朝下放在底部托盘的顶上,
用四个锁扣固定。现在,Escort 已准备就绪,可以拎走或用其内置的行李箱型滚轮拉走。
19
一般使用技巧:
19
18
均衡器推子位于零位
选配件:
警告:
为安全起见,请务必将调音台支架完全打开,置放于稳固平整的表平面上。
20
21
22
选配件(可从当地 Peavey 经销商处购买)
话筒支架带底座的话筒三脚架 (00722910)
额外的话筒和连接线附带连接线的PVi
®
2 话筒 (00496360)
话筒防风罩黑色防风罩 (00069100)
不同长度的额外扬声器电缆 - 25' 16 AWG (00060450)
不同尺寸的额外扬声器支架黑色扬声器支架 (00722890)
CD 播放器、录放机、磁带机或 MP3 播放器/智能手机的音频连接线
可选配的调音台支架组件(00496340)
从箱内取出调音台支架。调音台由三个部件组成:两对支脚,盒支架,横向构件(见图 20。如图所示,将支架的横向构件和支脚插口
结合住(见 21)。将一套支脚完全插入横向构件内(见图 22)。仍旧将横向构件握在一起,将支脚放在地上,插入第二对支脚。如
您需要移动支架,握住支脚,折叠携带。
20 21 22
Escort
®
3000 产品规格:
输出功率: 80 瓦有效值(每通道)
频率响应: 40 赫兹至 20 千赫兹 +/-3 dB
过载保护: DDT™ 10 dB,限制功放输出,防止发生会损坏扬声器的削波
失真度: 最大功率时总谐波失真少于 0.2%
信噪比: 88 dB 典型话筒输入
AC电源: 115 伏交流电 60 赫兹或
230 伏交流电 50/60 赫兹
组装重量:
(包括支架)
50 磅(22.67 公斤)
尺寸: 14.5" x 36.75" x 15.5"
(36.8 厘米 x 93.3 厘米 x 39.4 厘米)
扬声器: 低音扬声器 10" (254 mm)
压电高音扬声器
Escort
®
3000 的故障排除指南
问题 检查 更正
没有声音
LCD 不亮)
电源开关是否打开?
电源线是否连接在带电插座上?
打开电源开关,将电源线连接到带电插座上。
没有声音
LCD 不亮)
主控和通道增益控制是否开启? 调高通道至所检查
接。打开话筒开关。检查话筒或音源连接。
没有效果 通道 EFX 控制是否已开高?
EFX 静音是否被开启?
菜单中是否有激活的效果?
单内的效主控
EFX 静音。如果 LED 亮着,那么 EFX 静音已被启用。按一
EFX 静音按键禁用。调整通道 EFX 控制,直至听到音频
效果。
USB 优盘上的文件不能播放 该文件是否已提示播放?
音频文件的格式是否正确?
旋到件时择该
文件参见之前
所提到的支持音频格式列表。
扬声器大声嚎叫或尖啸 在通道或主控电平控制关小时是否消失,
如果是,那是声
反馈。
筒重后面远一
些。观察均衡器上方的 FLS 灯,减少相应推子的电平。
声音失真 通道增益是否设置很高? 减少通道增益,并增加主控音量
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
Logo referenced in Directive 2002/96/EC Annex IV
(OJ(L)37/38,13.02.03 and defined in EN 50419: 2005
The bar is the symbol for marking of new waste and
is applied only to equipment manufactured after
13 August 2005
www.peavey.com
Warranty registration and information for U.S. customers available online at
www.peavey.com/warranty
or use the QR tag below
Features and specications subject to change without notice.
Peavey Electronics Corporation 5022 Hartley Peavey Drive Meridian, MS 39305 (601) 483-5365 FAX (601) 486-1278
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104

Peavey ESCORT 3000 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Micrófonos
Tipo
El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para